2019 Durango

2019 Durango
2019
OWNER’S MANUAL
Durango
19WD-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Second Edition
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in the U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op-
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1
2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3
4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 4
5 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 5
6 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 8

9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 9
10 MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 10
11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 11
12 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 12
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .6
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas- customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take the time to read all of these publications carefully
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for operation of your vehicle.
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
you should only consider the information which is related
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
INTRODUCTION 5
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For Symbols
further information, contact an authorized dealer. 1
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
related information. component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold. ROLLOVER WARNING
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni- than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
satisfaction. passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
Essential Information higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
6 INTRODUCTION
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con- is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a government notes that the universal use of existing seat
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
Drive carefully. each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
Rollover Warning Label
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Doors 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Exterior Mirrors 5 — Hood/Engine Compartment
3 — Windshield 6 — Headlights
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate Handle
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 6 — Ignition
2 — Paddle Shifters 7 — Climate Controls
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 8 — Uconnect System
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Switch Panel
5 — Speed Controls 10 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks 4 — Seats
2 — Window Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Door Handles 6 — USB/AUX Media Hub
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 3
䡵 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .17 ▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .29
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Dead Key Fob Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .31
䡵 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped . . . .27 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The 䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . .35 ▫ Head Restraints — Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature ▫ Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats . . . . . . . . .65
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints. . . . . .66
▫ Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .40
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System
▫ Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
— Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . .42 — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 ▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .69
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .52 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Power Passenger Seat Adjustment ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .70
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .70
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .61 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With ▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .78
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 3
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .81
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .75
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . .75
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Climate Control Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . .101
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . .77
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code. . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .119
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Opening The Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .135
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .115 ▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .116 ▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If
Equipped.
3
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User

Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle
is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
Your User Guide — Up- Available when and where
dated in real-time you need it • Enhanced search and browsing capability
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface • Robust NAV application — If Equipped
Maintenance schedules Multilingual • Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
and information
• Icon and symbol glossary
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary • Warranty information
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able • Crucial driver information and assistance:
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date. Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry 3
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Key Fob
The key fob also includes an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob mation.
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
switch.
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate information.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
doors and liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
media” for further information.
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door mation.
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be acti-
vated.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
Entry latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
hand.
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
3
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back Emergency Key Removal
housing or the printed circuit board. 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emer-
gency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Emergency Key Removal

Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it 3
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
Key Fob Battery Replacement programmed to any other vehicle.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a WARNING!
solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery the OFF mode.
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
together.
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized modes which are labeled and will illuminate when in
dealer. position. The three modes are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the 1 — OFF
2 — ACC
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3 — ON/RUN
IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
WARNING!
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob transmission into PARK and apply the parking
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is 3
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
switch. vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Upon opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF mode. In could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
will display in the cluster. brake pedal or the gear selector.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is operate power windows, other controls, or move the
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- vehicle.
dia” for further information. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Dead Key Fob Battery

Key Not Detected Feature
If the ignition position does not change with a push of the
ignition button, and the instrument cluster display mes-
sage “Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed, the key
Low Or Dead Key Fob Battery Starting Procedure
fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the keyless push button REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
ignition. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency How To Use Remote Start
key) of the key fob against the keyless ignition push button
and push to operate the ignition. Once the starter engages
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
and the engine starts remove the key fob from the keyless
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
ignition push button.
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: • Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an intrusion
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start. WARNING!
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or 3
reduce this range. confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
All of the following conditions must be met before the
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
engine will remote start:
or death when inhaled.
• Gear Selector in PARK • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
• Doors closed Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped
• Hazard switch off The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) remote start prematurely:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level • Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• PANIC button not pushed • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• System not disabled from previous remote start event • Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
The Remote Start Abort message stays active until the To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. Vehicle
To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
NOTE: Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
Remote Start mode. equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
Remote Start mode. N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat SENTRY KEY
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is 3
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
ON/RUN mode.
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated The system uses a key fob and a Keyless Push Button
and deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa- operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to
tion on Remote Start Comfort System operation. the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. If
General Information an invalid key fob is used to attempt to start and operate
the vehicle, the system will not allow the engine to crank.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio If an invalid key fob is used to start the engine, the system
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: will shut the engine off in two seconds.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, the
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
tion. being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
CAUTION!
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
authorized dealer. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
CAUTION! the OFF position.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
and loss of security protection. is one that has never been programmed.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Key Programming General Information
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
dealer. frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Replacement Keys This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
programmed to any other vehicle.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- vehicle:
tion. • Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved the driver and/or passenger door open.
3
by the party responsible for compliance could void the • Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Entry,⬙ located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for Vehicle⬙ for further information).
unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security
alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate 3. If any doors are open, close them.
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
NOTE: Security System Manual Override
vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light doors using the manual door lock plunger.
in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Disarm The System
To Arm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm: the following methods:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF • Push the unlock button on the key fob.
mode. Refer to ⬙Ignition Switch⬙ in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Grasp the passive entry unlock door handle (if • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive En- power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
try⬙ located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
Vehicle⬙ for further information). vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi- system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
tion. described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition button (re- the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
quires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle). door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — vehicle security alarm.
Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition and If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
turn the key to the ON position. becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
NOTE:
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on disarm the vehicle security alarm.
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Rearming Of The System
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, up to eight
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will cycles if the trigger remains active and the vehicle security
sound. alarm will rearm itself.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. 3
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel down-
ward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door Manual Door Lock Knob
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the
door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock WARNING!
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. • For personal security and safety in the event of an
Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
before closing the door. as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOffⴖ mode, remove If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
Unsupervised use of the vehicle equipment may vehicle before closing the door.
cause severe person injuries and death. NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
Power Door Locks phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
The power door lock and unlock switches are located on block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
doors and liftgate. If you push the door lock switch while the ignition position
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front passenger’s
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob. if equipped will arm the security alarm.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry • The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile 3
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
hicle.
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
• Passive Entry activates illuminated approach for the
NOTE: time set by the customer (0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds), and
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to flashes the turn signal lights. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- tings” in “Multimedia” for further information
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature,
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and outside of
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fob. If one of the
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fob are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and 3
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped with
Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
1 — Electronic Release Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open 2 — Lock Button Location
with the handle and no key fob is required.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push the
button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will unlock
when you push the button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
NOTE: This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
doors are locked with the door handle lock button. This NOTE: Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
feature can be turned on or off. To change the current door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel. 3
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
using either Passive Entry door handle or door handle tion.
button. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
reacting and unlocking. by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
System
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped 1. Open the rear door.
and in PARK.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further rotate to the lock or unlock position.
information.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h). Auto door
lock feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
sections in the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
SEATS 3
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Child-Protection Door Lock Function these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
WARNING! • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
gaged (locked).
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
Adjustment Bar
only when the vehicle is parked.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Adjustment Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious 3
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —

Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard Recline Lever
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
WARNING!
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
WARNING!
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
place. properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured
or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Second Row Fold Flat Seat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo. 3
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard

side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
Easy Access For Third Row 2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to allow behind the seatback.
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Tumble Pull Strap
Release Lever
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward to it’s original position, and lock it
into place.
WARNING! 3
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Tumbled Second Row
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Fold Flat Seats
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats

Release Lever
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat. 3
Tumble Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
Release Lever intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
behind the seatback. result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console, there is To Raise Rear Seat
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the Fold the seat rearward to it’s original position, and lock it
third row seats. into place.
WARNING!
Mini Console Stepping Pad

Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the pull
strap located next to the release handle. 3
Third Row Folded

NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
position or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
Release Handles
WARNING!
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and Power Seat Switches
the seatback. 1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. 3
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of which could result in serious injury or death.
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
Reclining The Seatback its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
Power Lumbar — If Equipped Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats Some models are equipped with a six-way power passen-
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power ger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar of the seat and seat cushion.
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support. The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
Power Lumbar Switch
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
Reclining The Seatback
CAUTION!
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
switch when the desired position is reached. controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement 3
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
control which could cause a collision and serious Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
injury or death. the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury station presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. recall the same positions when the unlock button is
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the pushed.
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
which could result in serious injury or death. key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
two pre-programmed memory profiles. ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature • To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the Fob To Memory” in this section.
following:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do Key Fob To Memory
not start the engine).
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must select Memory Position Recall
the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
dia” for further information.
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instrument
3
To program your key fobs, perform the following: cluster display.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position. Driver One Memory Position Recall
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2. • To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer memory switch.
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile. • To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the memory position 1.
set (S) button on the memory switch.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
in the instrument cluster.
memory switch.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
10 seconds.
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory memory position 2.
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
seat adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
driver’s seat and steering column (if equipped) stop mov- benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall Easy Entry.
can be selected.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Easy Entry/Exit Seat Entry and Easy Exit position.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
vehicle. Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
cle’s ignition to the OFF position. Heated Seats — If Equipped
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi- On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
WARNING!
setting on.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin • Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, the LO setting on.
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- 3
tion or other physical condition must exercise care • Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even heating elements off.
at low temperatures, especially if used for long NOTE:
periods of time.
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
two to five minutes.
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in • The engine must be running for the heated seats to
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious operate.
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the • The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
seat. changes it.
Front Heated Seats Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The front heated seat control buttons are located within the On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, further information.
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious Rear Heated Seat Switches
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
seat. indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
and none for OFF.
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be • Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on.
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats • Push the switch a second time to turn the LO
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are setting on.
located on the rear of the center console. • Push the switch a third time to turn the heating
elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
changes it. within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
WARNING! screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. 3
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, • Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- choose LO.
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
the ventilated seat off.
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that to operate.
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
seat. start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that further information.
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
HEAD RESTRAINTS Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by Seats
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive, deployable
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be
head restraint is located above the top of your ear. readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The AHR will be split in
WARNING! two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim,
while the back half is decorative plastic.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
restraints are placed in their proper positions in the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
of a crash. system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could mation.
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
downward on the head restraint. head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head. 3
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
WARNING!
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted) • Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
NOTE: struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
head restraints require removal, see an authorized
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
dealer.
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, straint is deployed.
refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
WARNING!
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their position could result in serious injury or death in a
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After return- collision. Always make sure the outboard head re- 3
ing either seat to its upright position, raise the head straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head re- to be occupied.
straints are not removable.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
upward on the head restraint to raise it or push downward mation.
on the head restraint to lower it.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied,
or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove the head
restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling upward.
Then, push the release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Rear Head Restraint

NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
WARNING!
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the mation.
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating WARNING!
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
position could result in serious injury or death in a
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
occupant compartment.
to be occupied.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints

For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button to power fold the third
row head restraints.
Center Head Restraint Release Button

NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward using
the Headrest Fold button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
3
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the Tilt/Telescoping Lever
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If

Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering col- Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
umn lever is located below the multifunction lever on the To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
steering column. desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your key fob or the memory switch on the
driver’s door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steer-
ing column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
WARNING!
wheel to operate.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated 3
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
this warning may result in serious injury or death. remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps further information.
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated WARNING!
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
turn on when it is already warm. because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
• Push the heated steering wheel button once to turn for long periods.
the heating element on. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
• Push the heated steering wheel button a second time
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
to turn the heating element off.
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
on the view through the rear window.
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the viewing.
windshield).
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at
the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate
to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
the view obtained on the inside mirror. three detent positions:
3
• Full forward position
WARNING!
• Full rearward position
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
• Normal position
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power Mirror Switch

1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This visors.
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate 3
automatically.
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory seat
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position. Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in 1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. Headlight Switch
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage. The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
NOTE: The sun visor blade can also be extended while the switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
blockage through the front of the vehicle. (if equipped).
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
Multifunction Lever the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE: NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less sus- turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
ceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens tion. 3
cleaning procedures must be followed. High/Low Beam Switch
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi-
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution function back toward the steering wheel will turn the low
followed by rinsing. beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
CAUTION! Automatic High Beam — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
lenses.
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the en- out of view.
gine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK
position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake
is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE: Automatic Headlights
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
Beam” within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
mation. for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights OFF position. The headlight time delay can be pro-
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to grammed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens information.
will cause the system to function improperly.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp switch out of the AUTO position.
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
will come on in the automatic mode.
Flash-To-Pass
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released. parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is Lights-On Reminder
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper 3
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
the driver’s door is opened.
media” for further information.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day-
time, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not. switch to the parking light or headlight position and
Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Vehicle” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and
then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can
be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by turning the ignition ON.
Fog Light Operation

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or Battery Saver
the high beam is selected. To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
Turn Signals is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is ON.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec- If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
tive. the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. will automatically turn off.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the
turn signal is turned off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Courtesy Lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a 3
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights

Courtesy Lights
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Ambient Light
Dimmer Control
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
Ambient Light — If Equipped to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light with a key fob and the unlock button is pushed, the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open
of the floor and center console area. and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control
all the way down, to the (O) off detent, will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party”
mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its on the end of the lever. For information on the rear 3
farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in
termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights this section.
are required during the day.
Multifunction Lever
Dimmer Control
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
operation. position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation

Intermittent Wiper Operation Windshield Washer Operation

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled. off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will released the pump will resume normal operation.
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
WARNING!
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind- from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
with the defroster before and during windshield activate this feature.
washer use.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
Mist multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensi-
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
tive.
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the
lever downward to the MIST position and release for a NOTE: Wiper delay position three should be used for
single wiping cycle. normal rain conditions.
NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
spray the windshield with washer fluid. position when not using the system.
NOTE: • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the tion is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is 3
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind- moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
shield.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
may reduce Rain Sensing performance. operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
“Multimedia” for further information. operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Rear Window Wiper/Washer rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump
which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multi-
Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF
function lever on the left side of the steering column. The
position and the wipers will cycle several times before
rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
returning to the parked position.
at the middle of the lever.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
Rear Wiper/Washer Control throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
first detent for intermittent operation and to the below the radio.
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the
switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Temperature Controls

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Temperature Controls

Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is 3
ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual
mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside
of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.
REAR CLIMATE Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are ON.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the Up button
on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or the Down button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings. On the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings or towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature will move up or down with the driver’s temperature, when it is ad-
justed.
Icon Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger tem-
perature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger tem- 3
perature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
Buttons the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Icon Description
Mode Control Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow dis-
tribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Icon Description
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. 3
Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Rear

Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Controls
Display Rear Controls
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
To change the rear system settings:
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) appears. Control functions now operate rear
system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ button on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Rear Mode Control
Control The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets, the floor
outlets or both.
3
Headliner Headliner Mode
Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side shuts off the airflow.

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
72 Rear Temperature Display

This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants.
Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
Icon Description
Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Lock Button

Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear tempera-
ture and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release to return to the Front Climate Control Screen.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature set-
tings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Rear Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets. 3
The rear system temperature control buttons are located on
the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls

Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets, the
floor outlets or both.
Panel Mode Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear tem-
perature settings are displayed in control head. When rear controls are locked by the front system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and any rear overhead ad-
justments are ignored.
Icon Description
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. 3
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of

CAUTION!
the vehicle.
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Uconnect
Control System through an intake grille, located in touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or place icon in the rear temperature knob.
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing • Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
damage to the blower motor. Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
Rear Lock counterclockwise to AUTO.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
from the front Uconnect system. necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned tion automatically.
off.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature. The • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
Climate Control Functions
the radiator and through the condenser.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
MAX A/C
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys- MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the on.
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
NOTE: will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but Recirculation
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows. In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
needed. the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
Automatic Operation
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display, the front blower knob setting. 3
along with two temperatures for the driver and front
Manual Operation Override
passenger. The system will then automatically regulate
the amount of airflow. This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear mode.
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically main- NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
tain that comfort level. ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is glass.
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to Rear Blower Control
function automatically. The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any
NOTE: fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons.
This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. Turn the control
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
knob to increase or decrease the fan speed.
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Operating Tips
CAUTION!
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The Summer Operation
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel, The engine cooling system must be protected with a
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) cool-
damage to the blower motor. ant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Fluids
Rear Temperature Control
and Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for proper
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push coolant selection.
the temperature buttons. The rear temperature settings are
displayed in the rear ATC panel. Winter Operation
Use of the Air Recirculation mode during winter months is
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Temperature Lock symbol on the ATC panel is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored. Vacation/Storage
When the Sync feature is active, the rear temperature is Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
synchronized to the driver’s temperature setting. If the rear vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
temperature is changed, the Sync feature will deactivate. system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
CAUTION! (Continued)
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objection- 3
with warm water.
able, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
in mild but rainy or humid weather. dow.
NOTE: • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long Outside Air Intake
periods, as fogging may occur.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
A/C Air Filter
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
The climate control system filters outside air containing
the heating elements:
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
filtered out. Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
Maintenance” for filter replacement instructions.
(Continued)
Operating Tips Chart WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear passenger doors which operate
the front and rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the keyless push button
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Power Window Switches

The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING! 3
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not
let children play with power windows. Do not leave the
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the windows while operating
Auto-Down Window Switches
the power window switches. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Auto-Down Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
Both the driver and front passenger window switches have release, and the window will go up automatically.
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the To stop the window from going all the way up during the
first detent, release, and the window will go down auto- Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
matically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
switch. the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
To open the window part way, push the switch to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during Window Lockout Switch
Auto-Up, it will reverse direction and then go back down. The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi- passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
during Auto-Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually. push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Window Lockout Switch
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or 3
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Power Sunroof Switch
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun WARNING!
visors on the overhead console. • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Vent Open
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Push and release the Vent switch within one half second
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also and the sunroof will open to the vent position. During
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your Express Vent operation any other actuation of the sunroof
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are switches will stop the sunroof operation.
also properly secured. Closing Sunroof
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any Express
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In- Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
jury may result. second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. During Express Close operation any other actua-
Opening Sunroof tion of the sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
Express partially open position.
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half Manual Mode
second, the sunroof and sunshade will open automatically Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
and stop at full open position. During Express Open close from any position and stop at a full closed position.
operation any other actuation of the sunroof switches will Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in motion will
stop the sunroof in a partially open position. stop the sunroof in a partially open position.
Manual Mode Wind Buffeting
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof and Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
position. Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
motion will stop the sunroof in a partially open position. down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and Sunroof Maintenance
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
windows open, then open the front and rear windows glass panel.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to Ignition Off Operation 3
minimize the buffeting or open any window. NOTE:
Sunshade Operation • The power sunroof switch can remain active in Acces-
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes after the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open. • This feature is programmable using the Uconnect Sys-
tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
Pinch Protect Feature further information.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the Calibration Procedure
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will If the sunroof Express Operation feature is no longer
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc- functioning, or the sunroof is auto reversing while attempt-
curs. ing to Express Close but no obstruction is in the roof
opening, the sunroof can be re-calibrated per the following
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in steps:
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. 1. Set the ignition to ACC or the ON/RUN.
2. Close the sunroof glass.
3. With the sunroof in the closed position, push and hold
the close switch.
4. After 10 seconds of holding the switch, the sunroof glass
will cycle into the vent position and stop.
5. Release the close switch, then within five seconds, push
and hold the close switch again. The sunroof will cycle
open and back to closed as the switch is held.
6. Once the sunroof has stopped in the full closed position,
release the close switch. The sunroof is now reset and
ready to use.
HOOD Hood Release
Opening The Hood 2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully 3
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Safety Latch Location The power liftgate may be opened by pushing

Closing The Hood the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Get-
WARNING! ting To Know Your Vehicle”) or by pushing the
liftgate button on the key fob. Push the liftgate button on
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your the key fob twice within five seconds to open the power
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
WARNING!
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be During power operation, personal injury or cargo
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on left rear damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on left rear trim before driving away.
panel will reverse the liftgate.
NOTE:
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is • The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle
opening or closing (if ⬙Flash Lamps with Lock⬙ is enabled is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be • The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Set- below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
tings⬙ in ⬙Multimedia.⬙ (65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
NOTE: from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate
switches.
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically re-
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate verse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
trim panel. sufficient resistance.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the • There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
liftgate functionality. cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button
on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the Cargo Area Features
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
Cargo Storage
full open position.
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side of
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
the rear cargo area. 3
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen-
gage to allow manual operation. Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To access
the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the storage lid.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode. Load Floor Handle
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
protect passengers from loose cargo. moving.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and Tie-Down Hooks
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to 3
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the sway.
anchors provided for child seat tethers. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
use seat belts. HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han- openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve- battery.
hicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
3
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
Programming A Rolling Code
1 — Door Opener
For programming garage door openers that were manufac- 2 — Training Button
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
button that is normally used to open and close the door. Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
The name and color of the button may vary by manufac- ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
turer. garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
mitter button. push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both channels.
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate before 1995:
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
LEARN/TRAIN mode. garage door remains open at all times.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
step after the LEARN button has been pushed. away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans- to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
mitter button. which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in 3
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then
the same manner.
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
rapid. or gate motor.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
observe the indicator light. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
is complete and the garage door/device should acti- Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed. ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, garage door remains open at all times.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
erase the channels.
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
several seconds of transmission: mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position,
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 HomeLink will remain active for three minutes. During
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink is disabled.
open and close while you are programming.
Security
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
observe the indicator light. your vehicle.
NOTE: To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming seconds until the red indicator flashes.
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
cannot be erased.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
erase the channels.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Using HomeLink
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
held transmitter.
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security complete the training for a Rolling Code.
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The • Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call General Information
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
WARNING! This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and 3
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while ject to the following two conditions:
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
while you are programming the universal trans- cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets tion.
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by by the party responsible for compliance could void the
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage user’s authority to operate the equipment.
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Door Storage
Storage Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Door Panel Storage
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Front Center Console Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The front center console contains both an upper and a The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area. lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on 3
the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches

Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on with
the small latch located on the front of the lid. ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Upper Storage Compartment

Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower Lower Storage Compartment
storage compartment.
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted for- When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of the compartment.
lid.
CAUTION! 3
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders or
devices with cords routing through upper storage area.
Damage may occur to upper console lid and device
cables when upper storage compartment is lifted for-
ward.
Lower Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button

NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed, Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”. are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered front of the console.
below the fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl
from damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Console Cubby Bins
Fold Flat Mode

Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped Cupholders
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner, is Front Seat Cupholders
located in the front of the console.
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console. 3
Console Cubby Bin
Front Cupholder Location

Rear Cupholders Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers located in the front of the rear full console.
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Rear Full Console Cupholders

Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a light Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passen-
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
gers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control.
located in the front of the rear mini console.
Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information. 3
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders

Electrical Power Outlets • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not insert any other object in the power outlets as this
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the the center stack of the instrument panel.
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system needs to be
replaced. Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
outlet located in the storage area of the center console. there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
Front Center Console Outlet

Rear Full Center Console Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
cargo area. “battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from
fuse location F90 to F91.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric 3
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin engine from starting.
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
WARNING! • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
To avoid serious injury or death:
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
Power Inverter — If Equipped The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the elec-
trical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the cir-
cuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools. using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
Sunglasses Bin Door ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart- on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. 3
close.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely at-
tached.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying 2. Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by slid-
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside ing the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed with crossbar on the opposite side.
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
Thumb Screw prevent damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
3. Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot sup- 4. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
ports at each end. letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
Bending Pivot
Positioning Crossbars
5. Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving 6. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the deployment of the crossbars.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as
far into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Deployed Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
Stowing The Crossbars
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
3
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot

supports at each end. Crossbar Pivot
3. Position the crossbar along the correct side rail. Make 4. Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
sure the letters on the crossbar align with the matching roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
letters on the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail

Stowing Crossbars
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
Tightening Crossbar • To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the rails when they are not in use.
opposite side.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your • Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve- with tie down loops used as additional securing
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau- mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
CAUTION! • Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the frontal area should be secured to both the front and
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and rear of the vehicle.
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the • Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
place a blanket or other protective layer between the Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
load and the roof surface. traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not especially true on large flat loads and may result in
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as • The use of Sport Mode is not recommended when
possible and secure the load appropriately. using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
(Continued) (Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
4
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Location And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 ▫ Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Display And Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .170
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . .152 ▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
WARNING!
1. Tachometer
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
(RPM x 1000).
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
2. Speedometer service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte- 4
• Indicates vehicle speed.
nace”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
3. Temperature Gauge Pressure Cap paragraph.
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
CAUTION!
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem- age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
operating range. “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Fuel Gauge driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the tems are working and give you warnings when they are
ON/RUN position. not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can
vehicle where the fuel door is located. access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
Location And Controls
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa- Instrument Cluster Display Location
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer Main Gauge
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy 4
• Trip
• Trailer Tow — If Equipped
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• Stored Messages
• Up Arrow Button
• Screen Setup
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
The system allows the driver to select information by upward through the main menu.
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
• Right Arrow Button • Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus avail-
able, the position within the submenus is shown here.
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a • Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
main menu item. • Gear Selector Status (PRND)
• Left Arrow Button • Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Push the left arrow button to return to the main Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
menu from an info screen or submenu item. Fuel Economy, Time, Trailer Trip and Gain)
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
• OK Button The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
Push the OK button to access/select the information
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
hold the OK button for one second to reset displayed/
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
selected features that can be reset.
into several categories:
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
• Five Second Stored Messages
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the
white for on demand information. messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. Examples
of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi-
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
personal driving style.
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
• Unstored Messages Until RUN 4
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator system
in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
“Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake following procedure.
Pedal and Push Button to Start.” Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
• Five Second Unstored Messages Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes- for the following procedure(s):
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.” ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Engine Oil Life Reset 2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
Oil Change Required downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi- 3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will ”Oil Life” screen.
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a popup necessary, repeat this procedure.
message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off with
Display And Messages
ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for five seconds), and
the user will remain at the Oil Life screen. Includes the following, but not limited to:
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to exit • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
the submenu screen. • Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Traction Control Off
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Washer Fluid Low
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
• Oil Pressure Low
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the • Oil Change Due
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). • Fuel Low
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Service Anti-lock Brake System
within ten seconds.
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Service Power Steering
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position. • Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• ACC Override
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH or km/h • Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) • Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Service Tire Pressure System • Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
• Park Brake Engaged • Service Air Bag System
• Brake Fluid Low • Service Air Bag Warning Light 4
• Engine Temperature Hot • Door Open
• Lights On • Doors Open
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out • Liftgate Open
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out • Hood Open
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out • Shift Not Allowed
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out • Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Ignition or Accessory On • Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Vehicle Not In Park • Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Service Transmission
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low • Service Shifter
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green or
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
red telltales area on the right.
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items Tire Pressure Monitor System
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
main menu items for several features. Use the up and displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive icon.
display menu options until the desired menu is reached. • If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature set- XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the tire
tings may vary. pressure values in each corner of the icon with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a different
Speedometer color than the other tire pressure value.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
main gauge icon is displayed in the instrument cluster Pressure System” is displayed.
display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to
select the large or small speedometer display. Push and Tire PSI is an information only function, and cannot be
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or mph) of the reset.
speedometer. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
Vehicle Info “Safety” for further information.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Transmission Temperature
Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in the instrument • Displays the actual transmission temperature.
cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus. Oil Temperature
• Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure • Press the OK button to reset the average fuel economy
• Displays the actual oil pressure. NOTE: The Range feature is not able to be reset through
Oil Life the instrument cluster display controls.
• Displays the current oil life of the vehicle. Trip
Battery Voltage Push and release the up or down arrow button until the 4
Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
• Displays the current voltage level of the battery. display, then push and release the left or right arrow
Driver Assist — If Equipped button to select Trip A or Trip B.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the The Trip A and Trip B information will display the follow-
Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in the instru- ing:
ment cluster display. For further information, refer to • Distance
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Start-
ing And Operating.” • Average Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy • Elapsed Time
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push the left Trailer Tow
or right arrow button to scroll the submenus, one with
current fuel economy display and one without it. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instru-
• Range ment cluster display. Push and release the left or right
• Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L arrow button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake.
• Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
Trailer Trip will display the following: Audio
• Distance Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
• Average Fuel Economy Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This menu will display the audio source
• Elapsed Time information, including the Song name, Artist name, and
NOTE: Press and hold the OK button to reset all the audio source with an accompanying graphic.
information. Stored Messages
Trailer Brake will display the following: Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
• Output Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right
• Type arrow button will allow you to see what the stored
• Gain messages are.
Stop/Start – If Equipped When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Push and release the up or down arrow button on Screen Setup
the steering wheel to scroll to the Stop/Start menu
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
in the driver interactive display. This menu will give access
Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instru-
to Stop/Start settings using the left and right arrow
ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
buttons on the steering wheel.
enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen
For further information on the use and different modes of as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
the Stop/Start System accessible through these settings, what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
refer to “Stop/Start System – If Equipped” in “Starting well as the location that information is displayed.
And Operating”.
Current Gear NOTE: Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button
• On to choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
• Off (default setting)
Upper Left
Gear Display
• None
• Full (default setting) 4
• Compass (default setting)
• Single
• Outside Temp
Favorite Menus
• Time
• Speedometer
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Average
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
• Fuel Economy Current
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
• Trip A
• Trip (Show/Hide)
• Trip B
• Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)
• Trailer Trip
• Stop/Start
• Gain
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
Upper Right Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
• None Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
• Compass This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor

(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
• Outside Temp (default setting) system and status of the vehicle battery.
• Time In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
• Range To Empty (RTE) the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
• Fuel Economy Average time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
• Fuel Economy Current power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
• Trip A Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
• Trip B
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
• Trailer Trip lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
• Gain drive cycle.
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
• Restore instrument cluster.
• Cancel These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE: • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
• The charging system is independent from load reduc- HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
charging system continuously. during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping, etc.).
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery • Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri- 4
Charge Warning Light” in “Getting To Know Your cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
Instrument Panel” for further information. vices.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), • Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load parking periods).
reduction: • The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel (weeks, months).
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors • The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• HVAC System
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
• 115V AC Power Inverter System when the vehicle was parked.
• Audio and Telematics System • The battery was used for an extended period with the
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
following conditions: +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
Mode”) ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
During a trip: acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
115V AC, USB ports information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
– Check the audio settings (volume) system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
After a trip:
tales are optional and may not appear.
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys- Red Warning Lights
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ignition Off Draw currents).
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
and parking time). the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes- driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
sage is still present during consecutive trips, and if the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
evaluation and driving pattern of the vehicle did not passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
help to identify the cause. minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
further information. hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
— Air Bag Warning Light
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, 4
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
as soon as possible.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
— Brake Warning Light dropped below a specified level.
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in- The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser- The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
voir. fluid level checked.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
— Battery Charge Warning Light
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
or a related component.
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required. — Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the not fully closed.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
chime.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light — Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
inspected by an authorized dealer. This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
WARNING!
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be the system checked by an authorized dealer.
obtained as soon as possible. — Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi- 4
Light tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the able to cool: whichever comes first.
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for engine off immediately and call for service.
service as soon as possible.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake Emergency” for further information.
pedals are pressed at the same time.
— Hood Open Warning Light
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
immediate service is required and you may experience
open and not fully closed.
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single — Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
chime. This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake
— Liftgate Open Warning Light has been disconnected.
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open. — Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime. This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light continue to drive normally.
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
WARNING!
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
engine oil level must be checked under the hood. mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
— Oil Temperature Warning Light could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
CAUTION!
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as 4
possible if this occurs.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and WARNING!
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
Yellow Warning Lights above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
Light (MIL) slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition CAUTION!
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through Immediate service is required.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Warning Light — If Equipped Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta- This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” (ESC) is off.
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
previously.
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains Equipped
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than washer fluid is low.
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
may not be guaranteed.
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
event. above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
CAUTION!
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling and stopping ability.
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as 4
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
possible. tire pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
those tires.) as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
CAUTION!
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip- ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning the conventional brake system will continue to operate
have been established for the tire size equipped on normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
damage may result when using replacement equip-
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure — Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- Light — If Equipped
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au- Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. dealer for service.
— Low Fuel Warning Light Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this further information.
light will turn on and a chime will sound. The light will — Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
remain on until fuel is added. Light — If Equipped
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
— Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped Yellow Indicator Lights
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive — Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
(AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service — If Equipped
is required. Contact your authorized dealer.
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Collision Warning is off.
Equipped 4
— AWD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
system is not functioning properly and service is required.
all-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped wheels to rotate at the same speed. AWD LOW is designed
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light Refer to “All Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker. Operating” for further information on all-wheel drive
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And operation and proper use.
Operating” for further information. — NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power transfer
Equipped case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense driveshafts are disengaged from the powertrain.
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— Speed Control Fault Warning Light — Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
Control System is not functioning properly and service is lights are on.
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Indicator Lights The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With both lane markings have been detected and the system is
Target Light — If Equipped “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle
is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Target Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle headlights are turned on.
is not detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Equipped
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
Equipped function is in “Autostop” mode.
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre- LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
down (left) or up (right). ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional 4
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Operating” for further information.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either Blue Indicator Lights
indicator flashes at a rapid rate. — High Beam Indicator Light
White Indicator Lights This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
If Equipped push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
(ACC) has been turned on, but is not set. Refer to “Adap-
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating”
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
for further information.
scenario.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission information related to the performance of your emissions
control systems. When these systems are operating prop- controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within service of your vehicle and emissions system.
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system WARNING!
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist • ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
your service technician in making repairs. Although your nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
CAUTION! II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause • Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
further damage to the emission control system. It related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle control could occur that may result in an
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests accident involving serious injury or death.
can be performed. • Access, or allow others to access, information
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss information.
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul- 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
timedia”. crank or start the engine.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
PROGRAMS start this test over.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light 4
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
For states that require an Inspection and Main- 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc- happen:
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is • The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
not on when the engine is running, and that the to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
OBD II system is ready for testing. tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently to the I/M station.
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
station.
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .215
5
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .175 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .184 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .194
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .200 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .200 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
174 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak- • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and of such equipment should be performed by qualified
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight professionals.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- stop.
tion(s). • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
time after the stop). traction afforded.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
• Brake pedal pulsations. another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
(Continued)
SAFETY 175
Electronic Brake Control System
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
others. System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica- Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
tion may result in degraded ABS performance. systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability 5
and control in various driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
may stay on for as long as four seconds. Support (RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
This function manages the distribution of the braking
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
Brake Warning Light” is on.
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the Brake System Warning Light
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn- The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as on for as long as four seconds.
possible.
176 SAFETY
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
WARNING!
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re- The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
the light repaired as soon as possible. conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
Brake Assist System (BAS) those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys- exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
rate and amount of brake application and then applies others.
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock Hill Start Assist (HSA)
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
deactivated. down the hill as normal.
SAFETY 177
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
• The feature must be enabled.
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
• The vehicle must be stopped. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
• Park brake must be off. hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
• Driver door must be closed. all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your 5
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction a collision or serious personal injury.
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). Disabling And Enabling HSA
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
The system will not activate if the transmission is in current setting, proceed as follows:
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
remain active.
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING! • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist mation.
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
178 SAFETY
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster Towing With HSA
display, perform the following steps: HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing towing a trailer.
straight forward).
WARNING!
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake. • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
4. Start the engine. with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
turn to the left. trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
bank below the climate control four times within 20 or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on ing the brake pedal.
and turn off two times. • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right. be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON. collision or serious personal injury.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
SAFETY 179
Traction Control System (TCS) ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
condition.
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel appropriate for the steering wheel position. 5
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This appropriate for the steering wheel position.
will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
and ESC are in a reduced mode. in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
This system enhances directional control and stability of active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply- accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- conditions.
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
180 SAFETY

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- rollover, personal injury and death.
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in ESC Operating Modes
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, ESC On
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
others. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main- reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac- Partial Off
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
(Continued)
SAFETY 181
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will ESC OFF Indicator Light
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
will turn off. Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul- should go out with the engine running. If the
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on 5
to ESC On. continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
WARNING! after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
182 SAFETY
NOTE: evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
each time the ignition is turned ON.
WARNING!
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously. Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
that caused the ESC activation.
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta- safety of others.
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for more informa-
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
SAFETY 183
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from tion is required.
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
“Partial Off” modes.
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
WARNING! Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, 5
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
load to eliminate trailer sway. help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach applied to the steering wheel.
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
realize the correct course of action through small torques
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
Rain Brake Support (RBS) and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in important to realize that this feature will not steer the
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front the vehicle.
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
184 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
forward gear or REVERSE.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-
at the side of the vehicle, near the B-Pillar, and extends
cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has
reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
Rear Detection Zones
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will be of your vehicle, this may result in random false detec-
momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view mirrors tions on the trailer, and false chimes when the turn
signal is used. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for more information.
SAFETY 185
• The BSM system may experience drop outs (blinking on The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more signal is activated during the alert on the side of the vehicle
than a couple of seconds). corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert can be
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are heard. During the audible (chime) alert, the radio volume
will be reduced. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop- information. 5
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Warning Light

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown) see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
186 SAFETY
Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle. side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
SAFETY 187
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
5
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
188 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
Stationary Objects system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
lanes. glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
SAFETY 189
Rear Cross Path (RCP) (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will not be able to alert the driver.
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. 5
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
RCP Detection Zones injury or death.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph
190 SAFETY
Modes Of Operation NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi- When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
media” for further information. both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system RCP state always requests the chime.
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
Blind Spot Alert Off
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- General Information
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
object are present on the same side at the same time, both with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
SAFETY 191
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
tion.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
by the party responsible for compliance could void the the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
user’s authority to operate the equipment. sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
5
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation warnings by braking and the system determines that the
system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a and provide additional brake force as required.
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
192 SAFETY
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
FCW Message Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
will be deactivated. sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
NOTE: ing could lead to serious injury or death.
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h). FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the grammable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
normal FCW activation and functionality. tion.
SAFETY 193
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting • Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows from providing autonomous braking, or additional
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it the event of a potential frontal collision.
applies autonomous braking. • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the driver after ignition shut down.
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the 5
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible colli- oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
sion. higher rate of speed.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the screens.
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction FCW Limited Warning
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
for a more dynamic driving experience. Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
NOTE: Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
the system from providing limited active braking, or not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
additional brake support if the driver is not braking system performance is no longer present, the system will
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings. see your authorized dealer.
194 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
the system checked by an authorized dealer. crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
General Information inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning thresh-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- old for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
tion. natural pressure loss through the tire.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
by the party responsible for compliance could void the pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
user’s authority to operate the equipment. off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been
SAFETY 195
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
CAUTION!
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned off. • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the warnings have been established for the tire size
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
TPMS Warning Light off. eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, 5
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres-
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
receive this information.
assure proper TPM feature operation.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi- function checked.
ciently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to Sensor.
the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
196 SAFETY
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
condition. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
tire.
the proper pressure.
SAFETY 197
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic
displaying tire pressures 5
• TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
activated, when one or more of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
road tire pressures are low. In addition, the the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic
instrument cluster will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
tire(s) in a different color. Refer to “Instrument Cluster NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
further information. recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in TPMS Warning Light off.
PSI, BAR or kPa.
198 SAFETY
The system will automatically update, the graphic display If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
to receive this information. displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
Service TPM System Warning
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when
TPM sensors.
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five ings.
seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
display, with “- -“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
being received.
SAFETY 199
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire display will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
will sound, and the instrument cluster display will still 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
display a pressure value in the different color graphic information. 5
display and an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the tire assemblies on your vehicle.
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster display will vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five sec- will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
onds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
TPMS will update automatically.
200 SAFETY
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” by the party responsible for compliance could void the
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will user’s authority to operate the equipment.
remain in place of the pressure values.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above are the restraint systems:
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
• Seat Belt Systems
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the • Supplemental Active Head Restraints
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be dis-
played as long as no system fault exists. • Child Restraints
General Information Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Important Safety Precautions
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SAFETY 201
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
risk of harm from a deploying air bag: back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
for further information) must be secured in the appro- 5
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
rear seating position. to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
information.
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
WARNING!
further information). • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
them or under their arm. cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
5. You should read the instructions provided with your restraint.
child restraint to make sure that you are using it • Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
properly. seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul- straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
der belts properly. rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
202 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
far away from home or on your own street.
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the seat is unoccupied.
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
Initial Indication sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
SAFETY 203
Change of Status Lap/Shoulder Belts
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles lap/shoulder belts.
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck- sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
led again. part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
5
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items being thrown out of the vehicle.
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that WARNING!
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
cargo is properly stowed. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
BeltAlert. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
204 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
killed. abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your as low as possible and keep it snug.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
death in the event of a crash. not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the buckle nearest you.
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
belt. People belted together can crash into one an- your seat belt snugly.
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one (Continued)
person, no matter what their size.
SAFETY 205
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the the seat.
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. 5
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect around your lap.
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

206 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the any slack in the shoulder belt.
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
sliding under the seat belt in a collision. the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
SAFETY 207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees 5
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the Adjustable Upper Anchorage
latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of that it is locked in position.
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
208 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is Seat Belt Extender
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
into position. if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
WARNING! must be removed.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer WARNING!
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and when worn, the distance between the front edge of
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
the vehicle is stationary. recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
SAFETY 209
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints. 5
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg- bag must be replaced immediately.
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
Energy Management Feature
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt. The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the webbing in a controlled manner.
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
210 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
SAFETY 211
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 5
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Retractor (ALR) Locations • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt restraint.
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the • Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of in that vehicle.
212 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
the entire seat belt is extracted. who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, restraints that have a harness for restraining the
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat child.
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
ing mode.
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
WARNING!
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea- The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
ture or any other seat belt function is not working whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
properly when checked according to the procedures Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
in the Service Manual. requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in- seat AHRs will be deployed.
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
SAFETY 213
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if 5
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
214 SAFETY
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
WARNING!
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint forward and separated from the rear half of the head
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re- AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
straint is deployed. the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head Restraints” in
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
SAFETY 215
• Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an • Seat Belt Buckle Switch
authorized dealer immediately. • Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this section may be • Front and Side Impact Sensors 5
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional • Seat Belt Pretensioners
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer. • Seat Track Position Sensors
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a Air Bag Warning Light
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso- parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
System Components: ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
Air Bag System Components will not inflate.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
• Air Bag Warning Light it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
216 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn- the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning immediately.
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after WARNING!
initial startup.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air system immediately.
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
the ON/RUN position. detected, which could affect the Supplemental
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
eight-second interval. Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
remains on while driving. sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
SAFETY 217
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
5
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
218 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or vanced Front Air Bags.
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re- inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a seat position.
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle. WARNING!
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter- inflate.
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
equipped) or other system components. the air bags and you could be injured because the air
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an bags may no longer be functional. The protective
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy only when the air bags are inflating.
output is used for more severe collisions.
(Continued)
SAFETY 219
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more from an inflating air bag.
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
Front Air Bag Operation ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of 5
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec- bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or to restrain the driver and front passenger.
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- Knee Impact Bolsters
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli- The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial WARNING!
deceleration.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over bolsters in any way.
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
deployed. radios, etc.
220 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs). Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
structure.
SAFETY 221
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)

5
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
222 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children Side Impacts
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
bag.
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
certain side impact events. ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
WARNING! events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo- deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
cated should remain free from any obstructions. itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not Bags should have deployed.
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
roof of the vehicle for any reason. angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
SAFETY 223
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
WARNING!
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
WARNING! of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
killed. 5
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
they are in an infant or child restraint.
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
Side Air Bags.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re- Rollover Events
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
appropriate for the size of the child. events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
224 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The • Supplemental Side Air Bags
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may • Supplemental Knee Air Bags
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover • Front and Side Impact Sensors
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, • Seat Belt Pretensioners
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. • Seat Track Position Sensors
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete If A Deployment Occurs
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
certain rollover or side impact events. deployment.
Air Bag System Components NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system.
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) or all of the following may occur:
• Air Bag Warning Light • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
• Steering Wheel and Column deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
• Instrument Panel rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
• Knee Impact Bolsters
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
SAFETY 225
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like NOTE:
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag but they will open during air bag deployment.
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat authorized dealer immediately.
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, Enhanced Accident Response System
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, 5
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for In the event of an impact, if the communication network
cleaning. remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will the following functions:
not be in place to protect you.
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
WARNING! • Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem- the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System tem.
serviced as well.
• Unlock the power door locks.
226 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
Response System: from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
• Cut off battery power to the: the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
• Engine vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
• Electric Motor (if equipped) reset the system by following the procedure described
• Electric power steering below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
• Brake booster Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
• Electric park brake Procedure
• Automatic transmission gear selector In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
• Horn functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
• Front wiper changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
• Headlamp washer pump Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
SAFETY 227
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be thorized dealer.
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in- Event Data Recorder (EDR)
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the 5
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
side steps or running boards. in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
your vehicle that it has an air bag system. seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag record such data as:
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim were buckled/fastened;
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat erator and/or brake pedal; and,
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
(Continued)
228 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
seats rather than in the front.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
WARNING!
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi- even an infant on your lap could become so great that
gation. you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is are. The child and others could be badly injured or
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as proper restraint for the child’s size.
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
EDR. adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Child Restraints Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
the labels attached to the child restraint.
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
SAFETY 229
NOTE: • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
• For additional information, refer to http:// website for additional information: http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888– www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
327–4236 childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Recommended Type Of Child Re-

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
straint 5
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
the height or weight limits of their in a rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
old or who have outgrown the a five-point Harness, facing forward
height or weight limit of their rear- in a rear seat of the vehicle
facing child restraint
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
are too small to properly fit the vehi- of the vehicle
cle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Re- Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
straints who have outgrown the height or of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
230 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear- cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It • Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
is recommended for children from birth until they reach seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher in that vehicle.
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have Older Children And Child Restraints
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
convertible child seat. vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
SAFETY 231
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
seat belt. personal injury.
5
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING!
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
when installing an infant or child restraint. belt alone:
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be- 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments. vehicle seat?
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. way back?
(Continued)
232 SAFETY
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be- move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
tween the neck and arm? booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
WARNING!
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the will not protect a child properly, which may result in
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
SAFETY 233
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor
Restraint Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg) 5
Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X
234 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
Restraint System restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top 60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (5 Passenger)
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
SAFETY 235
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger) Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
236 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-
tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center po- No – 5 Passenger 7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and
sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor- N/A — 6 Passenger tether anchor to install a child seat in the
ages? No — 7 Passenger center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage? or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
SAFETY 237
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes — 5 Passenger 5 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the
No — 6 Passenger center position may be removed if it inter- 5
Yes — 7 Passenger feres with the installation of the child re-
straint.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the
center position may be removed in the sec-
ond row if it interferes with the installation
of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
238 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages

SAFETY 239
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether

Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
5
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top

Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
240 SAFETY
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat.
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (2nd Row

Bench)
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s

Chair)
SAFETY 241
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat. To access them,
pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this
will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
Tether Strap (3rd Row Bench)
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
242 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven Second Row 1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
Passenger Seating Only arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether — Five Or Center Seat Position Arm Rest Release Strap
Seven Passenger Seating Only 2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
SAFETY 243
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
5
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether that seating position. For some second row seats, you
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
located on the front of the arm rest. restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
244 SAFETY
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- that they should not play with them.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
WARNING!
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur- LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
er’s instructions. straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
direction. only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
Seat Belt: other items or equipment to the vehicle.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
Belt
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat lap/shoulder belt.
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
SAFETY 245
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
WARNING!
Restraints In This Vehicle
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into Retractor (ALR) Locations
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
246 SAFETY
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic

60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 247
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using the
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint, up to the recommended weight limit
forward facing child restraint? of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
back of the front passenger seat? the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact. 5
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes — 5 Passenger 5 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the
No — 6 Passenger center position may be removed if it inter-
Yes — 7 Passenger feres with the installation of the child re-
straint.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint in the
center position may be removed in the sec-
ond row if it interferes with the installation
of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating po-
seat belt against the belt path of the child sition with an ALR retractor.
restraint?
248 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap/shoulder belt. “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
WARNING!
against the child seat.
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
child could be badly injured or killed. out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. the Automatic Locking mode.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
may also move the front seat forward to allow more portion around the child restraint while you push the
room for the child seat. child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
SAFETY 249
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a anchorages in your vehicle.
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It 5
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
Anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
WARNING! tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
available.
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
(Continued)
250 SAFETY
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.

Tether Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)

Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
SAFETY 251
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On

Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting (5 Passenger
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
Seating)
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
252 SAFETY
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
(7 Passenger Seating)
SAFETY 253
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the 5
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
WARNING!
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
(Continued)
254 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING!
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
WARNING! Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked these safety tips:
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
cause serious injury or death. confined areas any longer than needed to move your
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, vehicle in or out of the area.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
injured or killed. closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
using a seat belt properly. trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
SAFETY 255
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Air Bag Warning Light
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex- illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air 5
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
or oil change. Replace as required. fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Seat Belts
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Defroster
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
256 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it mat on top of an existing floor mat.
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera- • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
vehicle in other ways. attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
WARNING! mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked vehicle.
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, side floor area. To check for interference, with the
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten- from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
ers on a regular basis. trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
(Continued) passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
SAFETY 257
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is Tires
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera- Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
vehicle control. lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the 5
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
position of the floor mat and may cause interference ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re- Lights
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch panel.
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water Door Latches
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
Fluid Leaks
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat. Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 ▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264 䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .282 6
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 ▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 ▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .283
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .269
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .269
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . .288
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .273
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .290
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .290
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .291
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .301
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .305
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .306
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .308
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .311
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .296
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .297
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Operation With A Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .321 ▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .321 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . . .338
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF 䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 6
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . .343
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Payload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Operation With A Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Tire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .331
▫ Rim Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .360
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Recreational Towing — All Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
belts. N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
WARNING! vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may 6
PARK and apply the parking brake. cause serious injury or death.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the Automatic Transmission
OFF mode, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked. The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a before shifting into any driving gear.
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or CAUTION!
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
precautions are not observed:
selector.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
(Continued)
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
(Continued)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger
complete stop. compartment.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle Normal Starting
speed. To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is STOP Button
firmly on the brake pedal.
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
Button er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ and use the accessories, follow these directions:
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place 6
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in the ignition to the ACC mode.
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
return the ignition to the OFF mode.
will display a “ Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of NOTE: Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
the PARK position, or it could roll. vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be re-
duced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If
NOTE: If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle warning message will display in the instrument cluster. For
speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and
further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle will
AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.
AutoPark If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK. • Vehicle is not in PARK
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are • Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
outlined on the following pages. • Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
WARNING! NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will

turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au-
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
toPark.
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
when exiting the vehicle. • Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into • Vehicle is not in PARK
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be • Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
relied upon as the primary method by which the
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed 4WD LOW — If Equipped
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
to Gear”will display in the instrument cluster. 4WD LOW.
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the the instrument cluster.
shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle of these conditions are met:
may AutoPark. • Vehicle is not in PARK 6
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH • Driver’s Door is ajar
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h). Driver’s Door is closed.
WARNING! ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in

PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the instrument cluster
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve- apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure it may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN further information.
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor-
mal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
WARNING! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- externally powered electric engine block heater (available
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
could enter the catalytic converter and once the After Starting
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
(Continued)
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
three-wire extension cord. limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
mental and should be avoided.
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
The engine block heater cord is located:
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes 6
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
dipstick tube. under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
harness. Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical in the engine or damage may result.
cord could cause electrocution.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON mode, the Brake Warning Light in the instru-
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the ment cluster will illuminate.
PARK position. NOTE:
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower • When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and a collision.
possible injury or damage. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to and cause damage or injury. 6
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or CAUTION!
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
selector.
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
thorized dealer immediately.
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
vehicle.
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
movement and possible injury or damage. someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the pressing the brake pedal.
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
in PARK before exiting the vehicle. should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve- running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi- against unwanted movement.
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. • When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
(Continued) the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to Ignition Park Interlock
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans- driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
mission gear selector. placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the 6
a location accessible to children), and do not leave OFF mode.
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
could operate power windows, other controls, or
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will
move the vehicle.
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
CAUTION! vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
precautions are not observed: This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
vehicle has come to a complete stop. selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
firmly pressing the brake pedal. REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode • The overall driving performance will be more conserva-
tive.
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. • Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
Push the “eco” button in the center stack of the instrument ited based on temperature and other factors.
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
button indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move
the selector rearward or forward. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
ECO Button indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is enabled, the turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
vehicle control systems will change the following: completed.
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting 6
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, Transmission Gear Selector
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift posi-
tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift 1 – Lock Button
2 – Gear Selector
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
equipped, will manually select the transmission gear, and REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster. it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information. (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right
(into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light is
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NOT illuminated.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
When exiting the vehicle, always:
is especially important when the engine is cold.
• Apply the parking brake.
PARK (P)
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Turn the ignition OFF.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. • Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range. WARNING!
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
brake.
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before movement and possible injury or damage.
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau- • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve- transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a against unwanted movement.
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify • When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi- • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number 6
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit mission gear selector.
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly a location accessible to children), and do not leave
pressing the brake pedal. the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure could operate power windows, other controls, or
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you move the vehicle.
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
(Continued)
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
CAUTION!
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
could result. cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, RE-
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can VERSE, and NEUTRAL.
damage the drivetrain. REVERSE (R)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
position: stop.
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the NEUTRAL (N)
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
• Look at the transmission gear position display and and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not vehicle.
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
WARNING!
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
that limit your response to changing traffic or road (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
have a collision. gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
CAUTION! During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
6
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
severe transmission damage.
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
Of Emergency” for further information.
has risen to a suitable level.
DRIVE (D) Manual (M)
This range should be used for most city and highway The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, tion) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
operating conditions.
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission 1. Stop the vehicle.
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab- OFF.
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 5. Restart the engine.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
operation.
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
be necessary. equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
AutoStick
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
tion (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im- NOTE: The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled (or
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Set-
provide you with more control during passing, city driv- tings.
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
towing, and many other situations.
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
Operation engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the
shift is chosen, except as described below.
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap
one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel (if equipped). • The transmission will automatically downshift as the 6
Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if equipped) to enter vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the display the current gear.
next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
will retain the current gear. The current transmission gear gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL vehicle is accelerated.
position), or the shift paddles (if equipped), to manually
shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) • You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
while in the MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
paddle (if equipped), will downshift the transmission to Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) (or icy conditions.
tapping the (+) shift paddle, if equipped) will command an • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
upshift. over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will down- Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
current speed. driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
AutoStick is enabled. improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
or overheat condition is detected.
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to switch bank.
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle
(if equipped, and if the gear selector is already in DRIVE) ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time — If Equipped
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only) trans-
WARNING! fer case, which provides convenient full-time all-wheel
drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with
personal injury. traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Driving
Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Three- This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
Position Switch) — If Equipped driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated by the
AWD Control Switch, which is located on the center console. For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case 6
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instruc-
tions. The LOW RANGE position is designed for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the LOW RANGE
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position) position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the instrument position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case control knob back to the current position, wait five sec-
selection. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get- onds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When you select a different transfer case position, the located in this section.
position indicator lights will do the following: The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF. the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
WARNING!
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON. Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light” is
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met: illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
ON. injury.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
to flash. or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the engine LOW Range
speed is approximately three times that of the AWD AUTO
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer 25 mph (40 km/h).
case.
NEUTRAL (N)
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction, there 6
NEUTRAL – This range disengages both the front and rear
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
For additional information on the appropriate use of each “Starting And Operating” for further information.
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
AWD Auto
WARNING!
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be auto- vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
matically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of trac- TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
tion. Additional traction for varying road conditions. ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shifting Procedure Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
NOTE:
the following procedures:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not Preferred Procedure
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi- 1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position (3 to 5 km/h).
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry a 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
shift: return the control switch back to the original 3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to the
position, make certain all shift requirements have been desired position.
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light Alternate Procedure
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. 1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain 2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
ON. engine running, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
AWD Auto To Low Range 3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
NOTE: FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
• If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate EQUIPPED
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
is in process, the desired position indicator light will cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
flash continuously while the original position indicator inputs or additional driving skills required.
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a functionality after a battery disconnect.
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to 6
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN POWER STEERING
position, then the shift will not take place and no The electric power steering system will give you good
position indicator lights will be on or flashing. vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
For information regarding the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
shift procedure, refer to “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” in from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
“Recreational Towing”. the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro- ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
grammable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
timedia” for further information. driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER- STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel con-
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. will automatically re-start the engine.
NOTE: This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer handle the additional engine starts.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in Automatic Mode
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers. The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for normal customer engine start. At that time, the
service. system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER- START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must • Driver’s door is not closed.
Occur: • Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
• Battery charge is low.
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. • The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your • Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
Instrument Panel” for further information. cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake 6
pedal depressed. • HVAC set to MAX A/C.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to • Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate • The transmission is not in a forward gear.
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
• Hood is open.
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting And
Operating” section for further information. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop • Accelerator pedal input.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety • Engine temp too high.
and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed • 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may AUTOSTOP.
be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen.
In the following situations, the engine will not stop: • Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. • ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort. STOP/START Off Switch
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode. 1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted. 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru-
• Battery voltage drops too low. ment cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli- Instrument Panel” for further information.
cations).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/ SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
START system), the engine will not be stopped. When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
on. the steering wheel.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
6
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
Speed Control Buttons
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. 1 — On/Off 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — SET (+)/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
WARNING!
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
desired vehicle set speed. control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
WARNING!
To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
snow-covered or slippery.
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
To Activate along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru- To Vary The Speed Setting
ment cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To To Increase Speed
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The pushing the SET (+) button.
system should be turned off when not in use.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre- Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h): (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph) U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph. results in a decrease of 1 mph. 6
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h) Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pushing the SET (-) button. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills To Deactivate
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
vehicle set speed. or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
from memory.
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, proper section within this chapter.
snow-covered or slippery. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
To Resume Speed to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph ahead of you.
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
WARNING!
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
following distance, while matching the speed of the and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
vehicle ahead. operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes: Your complete attention is always required while 6
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
propriate distance between vehicles.
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising • The ACC system:
at a constant preset speed. For additional information, • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
this section. traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode into account, and may be limited upon adverse
selected. sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al- distance warnings.
ways confirm which mode is selected.
(Continued)
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound
when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; 1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) 5 — Distance Setting Increase
Cruise Control On/Off
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
2 — SET(+)/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill (ACC) On/Off
slopes. 3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. 4 — SET (-)/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed. NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above • When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
0 mph (0 km/h).
To Activate/Deactivate
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(32 km/h).
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the displays “ACC Ready.”
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays 6
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” cluster display will display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING! • The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally tor pedal.
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Cancel To Resume
The following conditions cancel the system: If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
• The brake pedal is applied. button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
• The CANC button is pushed. set speed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. NOTE: ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
WARNING! 6
• The vehicle parking brake is applied. The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds. is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
• Driver door is opened at low speeds. conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
To Turn Off death or serious personal injury.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if: To Vary The Speed Setting
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
To Increase Speed
pushed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
pushing the SET (+) button.
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the To Decrease Speed
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre- pushing the SET (-) button.
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h): The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
U.S. Speed (mph) Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button (mph) or Metric (km/h):
results in an increase of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected results in a decrease of 1 mph.
in the instrument cluster display.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
Metric Speed (km/h) continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button in the instrument cluster display.
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
NOTE: The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
of the vehicle. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This 6
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi- distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming
to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed. 6
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) • The distance setting is changed.
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). ACC Activation).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts Overtake Aid
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
capacity. the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
Brake Alert
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster will be required at this moment.
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand- Adaptive Cruise Control Off
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
Cruise Control Off.”
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Driver intervention will be required at this moment. When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
WARNING! Control Ready.”
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must Adaptive Cruise Control Set 6
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
SET.”
personal injury.
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu cluster display.
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it • System Cancel
displays depends on ACC system status.
• Driver Override
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following • System Off
appears in the instrument cluster display: • ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
activity Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
Display Warnings And Maintenance
section.
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
Warning
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when vehicle behind the lower grille.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in to note the following maintenance items:
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will sensor lens.
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” and the system will deactivate. • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” require a sensor realignment.
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
this warning may temporarily occur. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
simply reactivating it. mance.
NOTE: The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen- shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. 6
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. examine the windshield and the camera located on the
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
operation. cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
when conditions temporarily limit system performance. Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
Service ACC/FCW Warning vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
accelerate unexpectedly.
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Towing A Trailer
Turns And Bends
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
Offset Driving may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC distance to the vehicle ahead.
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Lane Changing Example
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising 6
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
General Information Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio 20 mph (32 km/h).
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: To change between the different control modes, push the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Vary The Speed Setting
WARNING!
To Increase Speed
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to main- Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
tain a safe distance between your vehicle and the ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se- Metric (km/h) units:
lected.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Set A Desired Speed • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control results in an increase of 1 mph.
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been in the instrument cluster display.
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will Metric Speed (km/h)
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
in the instrument cluster display. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
To Cancel 6
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre- The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
Metric (km/h) units:
• The brake pedal is applied.
U.S. Speed (mph) • The CANC button is pushed.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected heated).
in the instrument cluster display. • The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed NOTE:
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and • The driver can override the automatic braking function
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
(32 km/h). ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
To Turn Off
• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory 4LO.
if:
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
is pushed.
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
pushed. with a detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED • The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a • The automatic braking function can be enabled/
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be auto- section of the Uconnect System.
matically applied and released when performing a reverse • ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision for the automatic braking function through ignition
with an obstacle. cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
NOTE:
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
vehicle. cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
substitute the driver. decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h). 6
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the ParkSense Sensors
vehicle’s movements. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
section for limitations of this system and recommenda- the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
tions. from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is of the obstacle.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense Display If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
The ParkSense display is always shown in the instrument
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
cluster display as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Park Assist Ready

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
6
Slow Tone Fast Tone
Slow Tone Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches
(inches/cm) 79 inches cm) cm) cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Audible None Single 1/2 Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second
Chime Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd 1st 6
Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st
Flashing Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd 1st
Flashing Flashing
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect switch.
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
further information. the system, the instrument cluster will display
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
The factory default volume setting is medium. mately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
ment cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
through ignition cycles.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense Warning Display
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro-
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System.
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
information. switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru- ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi- the LED will be on.
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the Operation With A Trailer
detected obstacle.
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear sensors is auto-
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. matically deactivated when the trailer’s electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle’s tow hook socket. When the vehicle
is connected to a trailer, the instrument cluster display will If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
show the ⬙Rear ParkSense Unavailable Trailer Connected⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
message in the following situations: outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
• For five seconds at vehicle start up is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
• For five seconds when the ParkSense button is pushed appear, see an authorized dealer.
• As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
NOTE: Refer to “Towing Requirements” in “Starting And appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
Operating” for more information on the Integrated Trailer rized dealer.
6
Brake Module. Cleaning The ParkSense System
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru- or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition sensors.
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- ParkSense System Usage Precautions
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “In- NOTE:
strument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
condition, the instrument cluster display will display the properly.
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
affect the performance of ParkSense.
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you cluster display.
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition. WARNING!
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
cluster display will display “PARKSENSE OFF” mes- your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
when it is sounding a tone. sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
serious injury or death.
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
bumper.
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system is behind the vehicle.
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not matic brakes are being applied.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close • Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
proximity. 4LO.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park 6
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the Assist system or the Braking System Module.
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
ParkSense.
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED • The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or • The automatic braking function can be enabled/
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the section of the Uconnect System.
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released • ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the sys- for the automatic braking function through ignition
tem detects a possible collision with an obstacle. cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob- mately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display warning will appear in
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. the instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE
and the speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the ParkSense Sensors
vehicle. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
substitute the driver. the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
vehicle’s movements. of the obstacle.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita- The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
tions of this system and recommendations. bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
changed to the ON/RUN position. 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in orientation of the obstacle.
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if
ParkSense Display If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Park Assist Ready

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
Single 1/2 Second Tone
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
Slow Tone Fast Tone For Rear Only
Slow Tone For Rear Only Fast Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument
cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a
continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning
alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches
(inches/cm) 79 inches cm) cm) cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Audible None Single 1/2 Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second
Chime Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd 1st
Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st
Flashing Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd 1st
Flashing Flashing
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12
(inches/cm) inches (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
Arcs-Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing 6
Radio Volume No No No Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. The factory default volume setting is medium.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle ParkSense Warning Display
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
is applied.
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro-
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in mation.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru- The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi- disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
Instrument Panel” for further information. the LED will be on.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Operation With A Trailer
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake
switch. Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear sensors is auto-
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable matically deactivated when the trailer’s electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle’s tow hook socket. The front system
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi- is still functional, and the arcs will be overlaid with a
⬙Trailer⬙ message. The rear sensors are automatically reac-
mately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru- tivated when the trailer’s cable plug is removed.
ment cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” When the vehicle is connected to a trailer, the instrument
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. cluster display will show the ⬙Rear ParkSense Unavailable
Trailer Connected⬙ message in the following situations:
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For five seconds at vehicle start up
NOTE: When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is • For five seconds when the ParkSense button is pushed,
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be as long as an object is not detected in the front
displayed. • As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (vehicle graphic
displayed with a trailer overlay)
NOTE: Refer to “Towing Requirements” in “Starting And messages if an object is detected within the five second
Operating” for more information on the Integrated Trailer pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
Brake Module. played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ 6
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected ignition. If the message continues to appear see your
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will authorized dealer.
display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN- QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- play, see your authorized dealer.
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN- Cleaning The ParkSense System
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function- or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the sensors.
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
ParkSense System Usage Precautions • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
NOTE:
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, Failure to do so can result in the system not working
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
operating properly. obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
affect the performance of ParkSense. behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
again, even if you cycle the ignition. fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as cluster.
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false
when it is sounding a tone. indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon- sensors will not be detected when they are in close
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to proximity.
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
serious injury or death. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an 6
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is ParkSense.
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
LaneSense Operation
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
is behind the vehicle. lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver Turning LaneSense On Or Off
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED in Lane-
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning Sense button will be illuminated while the system is
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to deactivated.
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, The LaneSense button is located on the switch
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through panel below the Uconnect display.
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. shown in the instrument cluster display.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual
warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
LaneSense On Message
not return their hands to the wheel.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
6
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale )
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow. is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale )
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected. Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale )
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
boundary. this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
steering wheel will turn to the right. • For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
6
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin

Line/Solid Yellow Telltale ) Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale )
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
dia” for further information. navigation or audio screen appears again.
NOTE: Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph 1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). Uconnect display.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. 2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel View Camera system on.
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes, NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
traction control system, electronic stability control, for- mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
ward collision warning, etc.). Uconnect System.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up information.
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across image will continue to be displayed for up to ten seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position, or the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
user presses image defeat [X] to exit out of the camera receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
video display. rear of the vehicle.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image The following table shows the approximate distances for
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected each zone:
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 6
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- path.
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re- • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
do so can result in serious injury or death. that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds REFUELING THE VEHICLE
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
the headlamp switch).
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the “Rear View Camera”
button in the Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle
(or trailer, if equipped) for up to ten seconds while at
speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the “X” but-
ton on the touchscreen.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

2. Open the fuel filler door. NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling 6
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel • Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel • Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door nozzle.
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe open.
seals the system. • Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the • Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel- back in the spare tire storage area.
ing.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
WARNING!
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the 3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is disengage snaps.
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is 4. Remove the storage bin.
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations 5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel
turn on. door latch to the closed position.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
Release Cable
1. Open the liftgate.
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
be manually returned to the closed position. cle’s GVWR.
VEHICLE LOADING Tire Size
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and Rim Size
6
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. listed.
Payload Inflation Pressure
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
all passengers, options and cargo.
Curb Weight
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Loading
CAUTION!
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be vehicle.
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the TRAILER TOWING
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the In this section you will find safety tips and information on
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow possible.
all loose items securely before driving. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect follow the requirements and recommendations in this
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
the brakes operate. Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. and trailer when weighed in combination.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
tion. axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor- 6
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo- mation.
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition. WARNING!
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
the trailer must be supported by the scale. can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
Tongue Weight (TW)
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control the load on your vehicle.
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Trailer Frontal Area Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
maximum width of the front of a trailer. through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
Trailer Sway Control
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Weight-Carrying Hitch Rating (GAWR) requirements.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some WARNING!
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized formance, and could result in a collision.
trailers.
(Continued)
Trailer Hitch Classification
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible The following chart provides the industry standard for the
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
Vehicle dealer for additional information. trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 6
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
GCWR (Gross Max. GTW Max. Trailer

Engine Model Combined Wt. Frontal Area (Gross Trailer Tongue Wt. (See
Rating) Wt.) Note)
3.6L RWD Light Duty 8,900 lbs 40 sq ft (3.72 sq 3,500 lbs 350 lbs (159 kg)
Cooling (4,037 kg) m) (1,588 kg)
3.6L RWD 11,600 lbs 40 sq ft (3.72 sq 6,200 lbs 620 lbs (281 kg)
(5,262 kg) m) (2,812 kg)
3.6L AWD Light Duty 8,900 lbs 40 sq ft (3.72 sq 3,500 lbs 350 lbs (159 kg)
Cooling (4,037 kg) m) (1,588 kg)
3.6L AWD 11,600 lbs 40 sq ft (3.72 sq 6,200 lbs 620 lbs (281 kg)
(5,262 kg) m) (2,812 kg)
5.7L RWD 13,100 lbs 60 sq ft (5.57 sq 7,400 lbs 740 lbs (336 kg)
(5,942 kg) m) (3,357 kg)
5.7L AWD 13,100 lbs 60 sq ft (5.57 sq 7,200 lbs 720 lbs (327 kg)
(5,942 kg) m) (3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: 1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward (to-
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire wards you).
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
The addition of passengers and cargo may require
reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be
necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight 6
Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch 1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the bottom 2 — Locking Retainers
center of the rear fascia.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) then Trailer And Tongue Weight
downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
the hitch receiver cover to remove. your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in CAUTION!
reverse order. Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
in the bumper fascia prior to installation. tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
• The tongue weight of the trailer. is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
in or on your vehicle. and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When 6
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for WARNING!
your vehicle.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
Towing Requirements guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
CAUTION!
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle have a collision.
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage ratings are not exceeded:
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
1. GVWR
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your 2. GTW
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the 3. GAWR
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
turning corners.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in spare tire.
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the • Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or while using a full size spare tire.
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
(Continued) “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
WARNING!
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure. • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce- tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac- when you need them and could have an accident.
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
limits. tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. 6
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. CAUTION!
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury. If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a effort, and longer stopping distances.
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required. Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH)
2,000 lbs (907 kg). trailer brakes.
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with The user interface consists of the following:
electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic
Manual Brake Control Lever
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compat-
ible with ITBM. Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indi-
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button cator Light” will not be displayed.
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
correct type of trailer must be selected from the instru-
GAIN ment cluster display options.
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
the specific towing condition and should be changed as until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
6
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
“TRAILER TOW”.
weather.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Adjusting GAIN
Type appears on the screen.
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on
(30–40 km/h).
the screen.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted.
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just
CAUTION!
below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10. ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
Display Messages trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined NOTE:
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the • An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with your
WARNING! trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the • Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of damage to the electrical system and electronic modules
trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermar-
distance or trailer instability which could result in ket module is to be installed.
personal injury.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
6
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged Four-Pin Connector
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area. 2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
Seven-Pin Connector AutoStick
1 — Battery 5 — Ground • When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
Towing Tips if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and • To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
traffic. to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped SNOW PLOW
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
you can get back to cruising speed. front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly
or could fail to deploy during a collision.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency. WARNING!
Cooling System
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other 6
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat- aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
ing, take the following actions: This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condi- Wheels Rear- All-Wheel Drive Models With All-Wheel Drive Models With
tion OFF The Wheel Single-Speed Transfer Case Two-Speed Transfer Case
Ground Drive
Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED • See Instructions
LOWED • Transmission In PARK
• Transfer Case In NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
LOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is al- towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
lowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This Warranty.
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: Recreational Towing — All Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not 6
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF. CAUTION!
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
to secure the front wheels in the straight position. covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
in any mode position. your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with WARNING!
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer). TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
transfer case. from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
towing. should always be applied when the driver is not in the
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure vehicle.
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result. recreational towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,

with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold NEUTRAL (N) Switch
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located 5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will there is no vehicle movement.
appear in the instrument cluster.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission
back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL, NOTE:
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until • Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
the engine turns off. before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
11. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
the brake pedal. any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
12. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button twice (without the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
pressing the brake pedal) to turn the ignition to the continuously until all requirements are met or until the
OFF mode. NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
CAUTION! • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to

take place and for the position indicator lights to be
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmis- operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
sion is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the will be on or flashing.
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
tow bar.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
14. Release the parking brake. normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
3. Start the engine. 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold selector switch.
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine
by the selector switch) for one second.
OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
6
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch

NOTE: DRIVING TIPS
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met On-Road Driving Tips
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
tional passenger cars.
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
will be on or flashing.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi- vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
cates that shift requirements have not been met. rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
CAUTION!
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low through water may cause damage that may not be
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range. Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre- 6
WARNING! vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement; (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range locks with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
front and rear drivelines together and does not allow than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
for differential action between the front to rear drive- effects.
shafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces. Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
Driving Through Water
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
there are a number of precautions that must be considered depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can
before entering the water. erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water Hill Climbing
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first gear
Maintenance and LOW for very steep hills.
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami- immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and shift
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
component damage. speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional WARNING!
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operat- make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
ing” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control. Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, • Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh exhaust system for damage.
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
complete the climb. required.
Traction Downhill • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
with all four wheels turning against engine compression values specified in the Service Manual. 6
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
direction. could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
whenever possible. wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
After Driving Off-Road cleaned as soon as possible.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .372 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .372 䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 7
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .390 ▫ Rear Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ All Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Assist And SOS Mirror
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even 1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
may discharge the battery. SOS button.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
WARNING!
just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as- Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
sume all risks related to the use of the features and • SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and for SiriusXM Guardian.
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
death. vehicle issues.
SOS Call 7
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the subscriber. NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
(data) network. LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
ASSIST Call 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to connection to a SOS operator has been made.
any one of the following support centers:
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS NOTE:
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
following important vehicle information to a SOS op- by the subscriber.
erator:
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
• The vehicle brand. may be able to open a voice connection with the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi- able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
tional assistance is needed. hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected
WARNING! with the SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as- emergency responders and provide them with impor-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
location), do not wait for voice contact from an APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit NOT OPERATE.
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. • Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
operable network and GPS signal reception, which there to help protect you.
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
SOS Call System Limitations 7
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
properly. capabilities.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, • The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri- and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR • The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
(Continued) dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device • The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
requires service. Please contact your dealer.” damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
WARNING! nected during a vehicle crash.
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you • LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized structed.
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. • Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the • Operator error by the SOS operator.
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your • Weather.
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
to, the following factors: steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
• Delayed accessories mode is active. sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
• The ignition is in the OFF position. applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE: NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by by the party responsible for compliance could void the
the subscriber. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE CAUTION!

(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required mirror clean.
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
7
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) 9005SL+
Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps 9005SL+
(Uplevel)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base) 3157NAK
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium) 3157NAK
7
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel & LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Premium)
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced A Authorized Dealer)
Bulb Replacement NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
system charges.
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process. Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon) — 1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
If Equipped from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. bulb from the left hand lamp.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the 2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner counter-
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not clockwise to remove from liner.
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a head-
lamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer 3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the open-
for service. ing in the wheel liner.
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclockwise
WARNING! to remove lamp housing.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of 5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious housing.
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop- 6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect the
erly. See your authorized dealer for service. replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
CAUTION!
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing and
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate bulb with rubbing alcohol.
clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamps
CAUTION! 1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and rotate
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counter-
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the clockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing. 7
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the 2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
bulb with rubbing alcohol. replacement bulb.
Front Turn Signal 3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
1. Open the hood.
clockwise to lock it in place.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing. CAUTION!
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb. • Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
(Continued)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace- The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat See your authorized dealer for replacement.
and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp Rear License Lamp
wiring.
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your authorized
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps dealer for service.
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See your FUSES
authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps WARNING!
1. Raise the liftgate. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
lower trim from the liftgate. fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
clockwise. place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
4. Remove/replace bulb(s). serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
5. Reinstall the socket(s). • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim. and/or disengaged.
(Continued)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent. 7
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse Blade Fuses
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. 1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in fuse).
vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Power Distribution Center

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan — If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/
Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2

F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine
Cooling Pump — If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module 7
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module,
ECU and Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Sepa-
rate E-Brake) / Trailer Tow (BUX) — If
Equipped

F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control — If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Level-
ing
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differ-
ential - If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock — If
Equipped
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If
Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only)

F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor — If Equipped
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel Engine Only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors /
Short Runner Valve Actuator — If Equipped 7
(Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mir-
ror / USB Port / DSCR / DTV — If
Equipped
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM — If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM

F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Dis-
connect Module — If Equipped
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power
Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-
Intrusion Module — If Equipped/Siren — If
Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights — If
Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise
Control/DTV — If Equipped
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM — If
Equipped

F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor — If
Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger
— If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel 7
— If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If
Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems
Module/HALF/Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC — If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console/Rear Cargo — If Equipped)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, WARNING!
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
water to get into the power distribution center and
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Thumb Screw Location

Jack Storage Location
Spare Tire Stowage
CAUTION!
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow the The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. power tool may damage the winch.
The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center-rear of
Spare Tire Removal
the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate opening.
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from storage
compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench handle and extension to completely lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the winch
stops.
Spare Tire Location

4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire

Spare Tire
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you to release it from
the plastic plate.
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube and
winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push it
through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate

Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
Sleeve And Cable
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the areas.
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the WARNING!
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
changing the wheel.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
3. Apply the parking brake. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised. 7
5. Turn OFF the ignition. • Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally sion in PARK.
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel. jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
careful of motor traffic. locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely Instructions for this vehicle.
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground. 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack Warning Label
Jack And Tool Assembly

3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange just
behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
7
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Front Jacking Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear WARNING!
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do not
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
engaged.
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
CAUTION!
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
Lightly tighten the nuts.
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING! 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
result in serious injury. leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for proper lug nut
torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
Mounting Spare Tire

10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from 11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective plate
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end of the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the protective plate winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
facing outward. shape wheel plate though the road wheel and protec-
tive plate.
Installing Protective Plate On Damaged Wheel

NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from Installing Winch
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec-
CAUTION!
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three power tool may damage the winch.
times to make sure the cable is tight.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools in
the bag underneath the others. Use the hook and loop
fasteners to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the jack
on the bracket by turning the thumb screw clockwise
until it is tight to prevent rattles.
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable may
and tool kit.
result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
WARNING!
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or seated against the wheel.
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the JUMP STARTING
places provided. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
Road Tire Installation vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug 7
WARNING!
nuts.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
WARNING! could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do

not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has CAUTION!
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
result in serious injury. booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
or electrical system may occur.
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica- NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
tions” for proper lug nut torque. the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
WARNING!
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s
front seat. There are remote terminals located under the • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
hood to assist in jump starting. the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not

touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly con-
nected for jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
(+) — Remote Positive Post (Covered With Protective Cap) sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
(-) — Remote Negative Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it. cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the Connecting The Jumper Cables
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery. 7
Jump Starting Procedure
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
WARNING! the discharged battery.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to WARNING!
battery explosion.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
CAUTION! could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
not use any other exposed metal parts.
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
CAUTION! an authorized dealer.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and CAUTION!
can damage booster vehicle engine. Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
the reverse sequence: in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
• On the highways — slow down.
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
vehicle.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum off immediately and call for service.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement MANUAL PARK RELEASE
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system. WARNING!
7
WARNING! Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Re-
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine lease. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
CAUTION! lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
(Continued)
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis- 3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch
Manual Park Release is available.
in towards the tether strap.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Release Latch
Manual Park Release Cover

5. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and firmly apply the parking brake.
latches in the released position. The transmission is now
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Release Latch
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
into position. often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
Stowed Position or racing the engine.
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
place.
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
seconds continuously without stopping when you are result.
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
matter what the speed. may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis- 7
CAUTION! sion shifting occurring).
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
for at least one minute after every five rocking- vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
(Continued) “Starting And Operating”.
Towing Con- Wheels OFF Rear-Wheel Drive Models All-Wheel All-Wheel Drive Models With
dition The Ground Drive Models Two-Speed Transfer Case
With Single-
Speed Trans-
fer Case
Flat Tow NONE If Transmission Is Operable: NOT AL- See Instructions in “Recre-
• Transmission in NEUTRAL LOWED ational Towing” in “Starting
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max And Operating”
speed • Transmission in PARK
• 30 miles (48 km) max dis- • Transfer case in NEUTRAL
tance (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Front If Transmission Is Operable: NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow • Transmission in NEUTRAL LOWED
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max dis-
tance
Rear OK NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED
LOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent Rear Wheel Drive Models
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles the ground) under the following conditions:
under tow must be observed. • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
mode, not the ACC mode. is off.
7
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section • The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing or loading onto a flatbed truck. CAUTION!
CAUTION! • Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than

30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing. cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
Vehicle damage may occur. improper towing is not covered under the New
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not Vehicle Limited Warranty.
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing. If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
CAUTION!
with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
ground. a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
All Wheel Drive Models • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case (EARS)
is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the Response System.
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
“Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions. for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .421 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 8
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 ▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .472
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 ▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM 䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
SCHEDULED SERVICING Severe Duty All Models
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
scheduled maintenance. only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as • Check engine oil level
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence • Check windshield washer fluid level
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil wear or damage 8
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
possible, within the next 500 miles (800 km). master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. Maintenance Plan
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- Required Maintenance
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 required maintenance.
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (which-
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
ever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
X X X X X X X
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle 8
X X X X X X X
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
X X X X X X X
brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed (which-
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
ever comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Flush and replace the engine cool-

ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
X X
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Change transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
WARNING!
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
• You can be badly injured working on or around a engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
have any doubt about your ability to perform a considered Severe Duty.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Reservoir) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5 — Engine Oil Fill
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
Checking Oil Level The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solu-
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom range of your climate. This rating information can be found
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the on most washer fluid containers.
safe zone on these engines.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the Maintenance-Free Battery
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be nance required.
displayed.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to battery that the positive cable is attached to the
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further posts and free of corrosion.
information. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
battery or any other booster source with an output “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. 8
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other. DEALER SERVICE
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
handling.
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
WARNING!
Identification Symbol
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you This symbol means that the oil has
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you been certified by the American Pe-
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service troleum Institute (API). The manu-
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
Engine Oil
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
Change Engine Oil
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is oils.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information. CAUTION!
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter- Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Selection Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec- lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
fuel economy.
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart- should not be used.
ment” illustration in this section.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi- You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
should not be used. mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine followed.
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva- certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This number should not be used.
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle 8
Materials Added To Engine Oil
fuel economy.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart- performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
ment” illustration in this section.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper opera- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
tion of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
further information. environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
WARNING!
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
every engine oil change. cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
Engine Oil Filter Selection for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos- hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only personal injury.
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
and are recommended.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
Engine Air Cleaner Filter considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
proper maintenance intervals.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable. For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
WARNING!
Equipped
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap- R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap- performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys- ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
information. compressor oil and refrigerants.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un- Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental 8
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician. Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
CAUTION! authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides

of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove
compartment door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this
procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door
toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door 5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab
from its hinges, there will be some resistance. and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the
HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
side to fully remove the cover.
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment
door.
A/C Air Filter Cover

1 — Retaining Tab
Right Side Of Glove Compartment 2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the WARNING!
cover.
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
CAUTION! with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to controlled and can start at any time regardless of
properly install the filter will result in the need to ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
replace it more often. fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door hinge motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
and reattach the tension tether by inserting the tether have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
from the face of the glove compartment door. service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the chanic.
glove compartment travel stops.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) 8
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
Conditions that would require replacement: lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
body) and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
• Rib or belt wear tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
• Belt slips also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi- vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
tion on pulley) should be cleaned and lubricated.
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. ing points:
Windshield Wiper Blades • Wear or uneven edges
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the • Foreign material
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a • Hardening or cracking
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film. • Deformation or fatigue
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
dry windshield. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with CAUTION!
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- be damaged.
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3 — Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
in the full up position.
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
blade from the wiper arm). wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-
shield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1 — Wiper Blade 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
2 — Wiper Arm allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 8

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp

Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
2 — Wiper Arm wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible Installing The Rear Wiper
snap.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
to disengage.
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm Exhaust System
1 — Wiper Blade The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
CAUTION!
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cation or oil change. Replace as required. cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
WARNING! vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe 8
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle.
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
where your exhaust system can contact anything that keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
can burn. operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
should be obtained immediately. • Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in whether the engine is running or not.
gear and the vehicle is in motion. • When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
vehicle. OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Engine Coolant Checks
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
or malfunctioning operating conditions. months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
Cooling System cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
WARNING! coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, condenser.
(Continued)
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, NOTE:
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
be added to the system please contact your local autho- in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
rized dealer. drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as 8
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with soon as possible.
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
proper maintenance intervals. tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
Selection Of Coolant radiator.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica- • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
tions” for further information. ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop- • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
to be added to the system please contact an authorized (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
dealer. are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
Adding Coolant
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
cooling system.
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use NOTE:
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to • It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. level of protection against freezing according to the
Please review these recommendations for using Organic temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) operated.
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of rized dealer.
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos- damage may result.
sible.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Cooling System Pressure Cap
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped. do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any 8
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
WARNING! Coolant Level
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, indicated on the bottle.
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. bottle must also be protected against freezing.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to for leaks.
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
Points To Remember tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- condenser clean.
freeze) to enter the radiator.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake tions” for further information.
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper WARNING!
maintenance intervals.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
WARNING! Specifications” for further information. Using the
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi- wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding brake system and/or impair its performance. The
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
brake damage. You would not have your full braking master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois- 8
capacity in an emergency.
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the a open container absorbs moisture from the air
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With result in a collision.
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads (Continued)
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
avoid its contact with these surfaces. cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be Special Additives
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
This could result in a collision.
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
Automatic Transmission sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
Selection Of Lubricant fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use affect seals.
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” CAUTION!
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
mended fluid.
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- Limited Warranty.
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
Fluid Level Check Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
sembled for any reason.
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your Front/Rear Axle Fluid
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
CAUTION!
Front Axle Fluid Level Check 8
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
adjust the fluid level accurately. The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at CAUTION!
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle. Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Adding Fluid
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. when the vehicle is in a level position.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 Drain
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m). First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
CAUTION! 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak. CAUTION!
Selection Of Lubricant When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could

damage them and cause them to leak.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for Selection Of Lubricant
further information. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
Transfer Case “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not RAISING THE VEHICLE
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be an authorized dealer or service station.
inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
TIRES NOTE:
Tire Safety Information • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Example: P215/65R15 95H.
Loading.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
Tire Markings
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric 8
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
Tire Markings tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load
103M.
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
and Temperature Grades the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or 8
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall. 8
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and 8
This placard tells you important information about the: trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. And Operating” section of this manual.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
tires. combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Metric Example For Load Limit
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
(5x150) = 650 lbs.) cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load carry capacity of your vehicle.
capacity calculated in Step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec- • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over- cause collisions.
load them. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
Tires — General Information • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
Tire Pressure damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
are affected by improper tire pressure: vehicle control.
• Safety and Vehicle Stability • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
• Tread Wear to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Ride Comfort • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE: At least once a month:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
erratic and unpredictable steering response. pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
vehicle to drift left or right.
inflated.
Fuel Economy
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption. CAUTION!
Tread Wear After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could 8
for earlier tire replacement. damage the valve stem.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire Inflation Pressures (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
WARNING!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
the Winter. load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside Radial Ply Tires
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) WARNING!
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The instability could cause a collision. Always use
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- with other types of tires.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, Tire Repair
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to the following criteria:
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
and cold tire inflation pressures.
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
additional information. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi- See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service tion.
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the
Tire Spinning
tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
gency” for further information.
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the 8
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
WARNING!
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
condition. wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
Tread Wear Indicators Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re- Life Of Tire
placed.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
Tire Tread maintenance is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire WARNING!
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
replaced. serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires. tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
original wheels.
oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
Replacement Tires
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when WARNING!
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread 8
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
original equipment tire sidewall. mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
Information” section of this manual for more information and suspension components. You could lose control
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, your vehicle.
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
control and have a collision. tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad- If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
failure and loss of vehicle control. conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
CAUTION! covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
ings. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
Tire Types adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
All Season Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires Spare Tires — If Equipped
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. Of Emergency” for further information.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi- CAUTION!
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
in sets of four; failure to do so may your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
adversely affect the safety and handling compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
of your vehicle. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not 8
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation Wheel — If Equipped
pressures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud- vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
using these tire types. authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
WARNING!
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
103M. which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
your vehicle at the first opportunity. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
on the vehicle at any given time. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
WARNING! for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result WARNING!
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 8
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
Full Size Spare — If Equipped lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first control.
opportunity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to chrome wheels.
the touch.
CAUTION!
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. lent is recommended.
CAUTION! NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an

extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. vehicle vibration when braking.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
WARNING!
Clear Coat Wheels
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
CAUTION! between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage CAUTION!
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US- following precautions:
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is tween tires and other suspension components, it is
required to maintain this finish. important that only traction devices in good condi- 8
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear- that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damaged parts of the device before further use.
damage. • Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
• Install on rear tires only.
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Due to limited clearance, the Koing XG-12 PRO traction • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
device or equivalent is recommended on 265/60R18, ment.
P265/60R18, and 265/50R20 tires.
(Continued)
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is shown in the following diagram.
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, Tire Rotation
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades
TIRE QUALITY GRADES The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
The following tire grading categories were established B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu- tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
tires on your vehicle. performance.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled 8
peak traction characteristics.
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half Temperature Grades
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
test wheel.
teristics and climate.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas- and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A age when the system is started again.
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law. BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
WARNING!
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
The temperature grade for this tire is established for graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load- trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
heat buildup and possible tire failure. which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
STORING THE VEHICLE cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
tion.
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery: The following maintenance recommendations will enable
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion? Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle. Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are: Washing
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
• Stone and gravel impact. in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Remover to remove.
Body And Underbody Maintenance • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner 8
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
Cleaning Headlights paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
CAUTION!
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such packaged and sealed.
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
metal and painted surfaces. or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
Special Care match the color of your vehicle.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near INTERIORS
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month. Seats And Fabric Parts
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and carpeting.
open.
WARNING!
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
considered the responsibility of the owner. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar areas they may cause respiratory harm.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
Seat Belt Maintenance
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
owner. or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
CAUTION!
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
buckles do not work properly. painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
WARNING!
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 8
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Plastic And Coated Parts cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
CAUTION!
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular damage to the upholstery may result.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and Glass Surfaces
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
that may scratch the elements.
maintain the original condition.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer directly on the mirror.
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 ▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .483
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .483
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .479 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 9
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
478 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel
pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also is stamped on the right front floor,
behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat
forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information Dis-
closure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save
this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identifi-
cation number and optional equipment. Windshield VIN Label Location
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 479
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
Right Front Body VIN Location deep wall socket.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. Torque Specifications
9
BRAKE SYSTEM
Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys- Torque Size Socket Size
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal 130 Ft-Lbs M14 x 1.50 22 mm
capability, the remaining system will still function. How- (176 N·m)
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli- **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each Torque Patterns
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half WARNING!
way).
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
service station. result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
3.6L Engine
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than ing service for the vehicle.
15% in this engine.
5.7L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
emissions regulations and provide opti-
15% in this engine.
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded This engine is designed to meet all emis-
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc- sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tane number of 87 as specified by the tory fuel economy and performance
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
engines. use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec- 9
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
a heavy knocking sound, see an dealer immediately. Use of cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
Vehicle Limited Warranty. engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider- Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
ing service for the vehicle. line contains a higher level of detergents
Reformulated Gasoline to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
gasoline is recommended. Visit
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
quality.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
components.
phragm materials.
Materials Added To Fuel
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
ates such as ethanol.
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
CAUTION!
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or • Operate in a lean mode.
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability • OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
problems, damage critical fuel system components, • Poor engine performance.
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
ethanol (E-15).
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are 9
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War- not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
ranty. not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline Fuel System Cautions
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended CAUTION!
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond performance:
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. mance and damage the emissions control system.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
and California reformulated gasoline. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you. kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
Carbon Monoxide Warnings engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
WARNING!
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon- tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
oxide poisoning: time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can all side windows fully open.
(Continued) 9
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 Gallons 93.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer
Tow Package
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow
Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without
Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell
Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell
Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. 9
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use
E-85).
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam- sible.
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
may plug the radiator.
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
freeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE 9
J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 ▫ Second Row USB Charging Port . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 ▫ Blu-ray Disc Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect ▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
4C/4C NAV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 10
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 ▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .533
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device. . .533
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
492 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . . . .546 ▫ Navigation (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 ▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty. . .546
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .551
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) . . . . .564
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 ▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 ▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 ▫ Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 ▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Voice Text Reply — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .559 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
MULTIMEDIA 493
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Main Menu 10

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
Uconnect 4 Main Menu PARK.
494 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa- possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
tion. This information allows systems and features in your breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
vehicle to function properly. including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea- result in an accident involving serious injury or
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful death.
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com- software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
updates to improve the usability and performance of your breached.
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
unlawful access to your vehicle systems. ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your dealer immediately.
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
MULTIMEDIA 495
NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
regarding software updates. touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners change the customer programmable features. Many fea-
should: tures can vary by vehicle.
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri- 10
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
Uconnect 4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On

Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
496 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings
Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date,
Safety & Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Sys-
tem Information.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
your selection. Once the setting is complete, press the Back
On Touchscreen
Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or
“Down” Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
MULTIMEDIA 497
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
Set Language On Off
10
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
498 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:

Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
fter pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
MULTIMEDIA 499
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Set Time and Format 12 hr 24 hr AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Date Month Day Year
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the current date.
Safety/Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options 10

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay is canceled if
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position.
500 MULTIMEDIA

ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Brak-
ing
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option
is selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pres-
sure is needed. When the “Warning & Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
MULTIMEDIA 501

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front
of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you,
based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you the
least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or vi-
sual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound & Display.”
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High 10
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system detects objects located behind
the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
502 MULTIMEDIA

LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual
alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Paddle Shifters Enable Disable
MULTIMEDIA 503
Mirrors & Wipers — If Equipped
After pressing the “Mirrors & Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights 10
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With Wipers — If On Off
Equipped
504 MULTIMEDIA

Headlight Illumination On Ap- 0 sec 30 sec
proach 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beam — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under cer-
tain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If Yes No
Equipped
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
MULTIMEDIA 505
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmis-
sion is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start On Off
10
— If Equipped
Passive Entry On Off
506 MULTIMEDIA

Remote Door Unlock/Door Driver All
Unlock
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors unlock no matter which Pas-
sive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the
driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening once. If the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Personal Settings Linked On Off
To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s
seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
MULTIMEDIA 507
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto-On Driver Heated/ Off Remote Start All Starts
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tem-
peratures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

10
Engine Off Power Delay — If 0 sec 45 sec
Equipped 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
508 MULTIMEDIA

60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
MULTIMEDIA 509

Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down Ar- Left Arrow Right Ar- Center “C”
Button row Button Button row Button Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
10
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
510 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
MULTIMEDIA 511

Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel X 10
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
Restore App Drawer to OK Cancel
Default Order
Restore Apps OK Cancel
512 MULTIMEDIA

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove per-
sonal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?”
Modem Reset OK Cancel
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version.
MULTIMEDIA 513
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
4C/4C NAV Settings screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings”
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
either press the “Back” Arrow button on the touchscreen to
access programmable features that may be equipped
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety &
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Driving Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors &
“Up” or “Down” Arrow button on the right side of the
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Suspen-
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
sion, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Acces-
available settings.
sibility, Reset, and System Information.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: 10
Language English Espanol Francais
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
514 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights + -
ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
Display Brightness With Headlights + -
OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
Set Theme On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
MULTIMEDIA 515

Control Screen Time-Out — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster On Off
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the 10
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:

Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
516 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Sync Time With GPS On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen
must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
MULTIMEDIA 517
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Backup Camera On Off
Delay
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup On Off
Camera Guidelines
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or 10
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
518 MULTIMEDIA

Forward Collision Warn- Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
ing — If Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option
is selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pres-
sure is needed. When the “Warning & Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
a potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warn- Near Med Far
ing Sensitivity — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front
of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you,
based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you the
least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. The default setting is “Med.”
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
MULTIMEDIA 519

NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects in front or behind the vehicle. Front Parksense scans for objects
when the transmission gear selector is in DRIVE, and Rear Parksense scans for objects when the transmission gear
selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (au-
dible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or
“Sound & Display.”
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking On Off
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system detects objects located behind
the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
10
LaneSense Warning — If Early Medium Late
Equipped
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Low Medium High
Equipped
520 MULTIMEDIA

Blind Spot Alert — If Off Lights Lights & Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert system is activated and shows a visual alert in
the outside mirrors, and may also play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind
Spot Alert system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned results in the Blind Spot Alert System not operating to specification.
Electric Power Steering Normal Sport Comfort
Default — If Equipped
NOTE:
When “Electric Power Steering Default” is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to ei-
ther normal, sport, or comfort.
Hill Start Assist — If On Off
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 521
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the “Mirrors & Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.

60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights 10
Headlights With Wipers — If On Off
Equipped
522 MULTIMEDIA

Headlight Illuminated On Approach 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High Beams— If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activates/deactivates automatically
under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If On Off
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 523
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEU-
TRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
10
Sound Horn With Remote On Off
Start
524 MULTIMEDIA

1st Press Of Key Fob Un- Driver Door All Doors
locks
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no mat-
ter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
MULTIMEDIA 525

Personal Settings Linked On Off
to Key Fob — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steer-
ing column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If On Off
Equipped
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto-On Driver Heated/ Off Remote Start All Starts
Vented & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If 10
Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn
ON.
526 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Engine Off Power Delay — If 0 sec 45 sec
Equipped 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets remains active for up
to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this feature.
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 527
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Vol- Off 1 2 3 10
ume
Surround Sound — On Off
If Equipped
528 MULTIMEDIA

AUX Volume Offset + -
— If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Phone/Bluetooth Settings
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA 529

Smartphone Projection Manager List Of Connected Phones
NOTE: Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives
you the option to determine which phone will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay or Android Auto).
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you 10
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
530 MULTIMEDIA

Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Accessibility On Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray
functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will an-
nounce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
MULTIMEDIA 531
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Personal Settings Ok Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default
setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to reset your settings to default?”
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove per-
sonal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want
to clear all personal data?” 10
532 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)
MULTIMEDIA 533
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Media Mode
push-button in the center and controls the volume and Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
rocker switch decreases the volume. current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.) play.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push- IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
different depending on which mode you are in.
plugged into the USB port, located inside the storage area
The following describes the left-hand control operation in on the center stack of the instrument panel.
each mode.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
Radio Operation iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates. 10
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
The button located in the center of the left-hand control Manual Supplement.
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
grammed in the radio preset button.
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port which
is located in the center console.
534 MULTIMEDIA
The USB ports on the Media Hub are equipped with a NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart Charge) feature. charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/MP3
This feature allows a device to charge for up to one hour control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leav-
after the vehicle is powered off. ing the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/MP3
control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to device).
the vehicles iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or exter- NOTE: For further information, refer to the Uconnect
nal USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
audio device starts charging and is ready for use.
MULTIMEDIA 535
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second row USB connector ports can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod
or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging ports
which are located either on the rear of the front center
console and/or in the second row center console.
Second Row Center Console USB Port

UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give 10
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite
CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices.
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
536 MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started • Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the the power button on the remote control.
LCD screen cover by lifting up on the cover. • When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray
disc is inserted into the disc player, the screen(s) turn(s)
on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on
and playback begins.
RSE System Screen

• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray disc
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc player, the icon
will be present on the player.
MULTIMEDIA 537
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the remote control and headphones, refers to Screen
1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote
Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors

• The system can be controlled either by the front seat
occupants utilizing the touchscreen radio or by the rear
seat occupants using the remote control. 10
Dual Video Screen
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
538 MULTIMEDIA
Blu-ray Disc Player 2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
Play A Blu-ray Disc
switch is on Rear 1.
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center console.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen, the lan-
guage screen, or starts playing the first track.
MULTIMEDIA 539
Using The Touchscreen Radio 3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Press-
ing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
2/Channel 2 source.
Rear Media Control Screen 6. Cabin Audio Mode
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This entertainment source currently shown on the rear media 10
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/ control screen.
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
1/Channel 1 source. Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
2. RSE Power 8. RSE Mode
Press to turn RSE On/Off. Select this button to change source for the active (high-
lighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
540 MULTIMEDIA
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the rear media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing
the Blu-ray disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
and options.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
Play Video Games input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video audio/video jacks:
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat. 1. HDMI Input.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on 2. Right audio in (red).
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for 3. Left audio in (white).
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 4. Video in (yellow).
player.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may exceed
the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
MULTIMEDIA 541
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Using The Remote Control
Radio
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
ENTER/OK.
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
10
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen

542 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect system touch-
screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen

NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote control
functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will
turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the DISC
button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
MULTIMEDIA 543
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If Equipped
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source will
display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source will
display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the screen(s) are closed.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control

Controls And Indicators 10
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
544 MULTIMEDIA
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is pushed, 11. Keypad — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
the currently affected channel or channel button is
12. (Stop) — Stops disc play.
illuminated momentarily.
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
current audio track or video chapter.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
14. — Mutes headphone audio.
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote 15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to source
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left selection screen.
screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
position, the remote controls the functionality of head-
phone Channel 2 (right screen). 17. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus. 18. OK— Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu. 19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the Headphones Operation
current audio track or video chapter. The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc play. using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
features. verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted
and the headphone channel selector switch is on the
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and shuffle desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the DVD title charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
menu, or to access disc menus.
MULTIMEDIA 545
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Re-
1 — Power Button mote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are
2 — Volume Control
tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
3 — Channel Selection Switch
10
• When both the headphone and the remote control
Controls channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the Re-
mote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
on the right ear cup.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
546 MULTIMEDIA
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
the available modes and push the OK button to select initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
the new mode. Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the warranty is not transferable.
BACK button on the remote control. How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
Replacing The Headphone Batteries long as you own the Product.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
operation. To replace the batteries: below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down- What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
ward. not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac- Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
cording to the polarity diagram shown. use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is
3. Replace the battery compartment cover. available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
Accessibility — If Equipped PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray system that FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS AP-
announces a function prior to performing the action. For TIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
further information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul- INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
timedia.” PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
MULTIMEDIA 547
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limita- System Information
tion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
Disc Menu
legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary
from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
of all commands which control playback of the disc.
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to
replace any discontinued Product with a comparable Display Settings
model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Aptiv wireless headphones, or to register your wireless 10
headphones, please phone:
1-248-724-5900
Video Screen Display Settings

548 MULTIMEDIA
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD Video • To change the current audio mode, push the remote
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display Set- the next available audio mode without using the Mode/
tings menu. These settings control the appearance of the Source Select menu.
video on the screen. The factory default settings are already • When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
these settings under normal circumstances. display menu or media.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga- If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the remote that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button. still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s installed in the headphones.
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player. Disc Formats
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing the following
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the types of 4.7 inches (12 cm) diameter discs:
screen closed: • BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel. • DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
• Close the video screen. DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
MULTIMEDIA 549
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6) play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW
profile 3.0 disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
DVD Region Codes
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
not match the region code for the player, the disc will not
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
play.
when recording discs.
DVD Audio Support • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc are playable.
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default • For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material each track number is unique.
is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may
result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO- 10
the volume level to account for this change in level, 9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
to another mode. • The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
Recorded Discs
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
Video_TS portion of the disc.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-
ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also
550 MULTIMEDIA
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable • Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
software publisher for more information about burning Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playable discs. playing the next available file.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the next available file.
DVD player. • If you are creating your own files, the recommended
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA) fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
CD-RW).
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA files or previous file.
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙.WMA⬙.
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these exten-
sions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
MULTIMEDIA 551
Disc Errors property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise autho-
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
rized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
is prohibited.
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured un-
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
der license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP Loss-
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
less⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skip-
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
ping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
the first track.
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tem- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
perature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is 10
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the rear not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
Disc player. down or off during mobile phone operation when not
Product Agreement using Uconnect (if equipped).
This product incorporates copyright protection technology

that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
552 MULTIMEDIA
Regulatory And Safety Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
human body. cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines tion.
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
munity. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
MULTIMEDIA 553
NOTE: UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply Introducing Uconnect
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures: 10
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver. Uconnect 4
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
554 MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV

• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
NOTE: If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect
4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system. • You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
MULTIMEDIA 555
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Voice Commands • “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
3 — Push To End Call 10
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
556 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say,
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Uconnect 4 Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
MULTIMEDIA 557
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media 10

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Uconnect 4 Media
558 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 4 Phone
MULTIMEDIA 559
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “ Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without I’ll be late.
me.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
Call me. Are you there 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
yet? 45, 60> minutes
late.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone 10
I’ll call you later. I need direc- See you in 5 <or
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped tions. 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR I’m on my way. Can’t talk right 45, 60> minutes.
button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “ I’m lost. now. Thanks.
Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
560 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if

your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
MULTIMEDIA 561
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
following commands:
• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or Uconnect 4 Climate
steering wheel if equipped.
10
562 MULTIMEDIA
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate

Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
MULTIMEDIA 563
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
CAUTION!
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without Remote Vehicle Start**
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net- Remote Horn & Lights
work connection compatible with your device.
Roadside Assistance Call
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- Vehicle Health Reports**
rized by the subscriber.
Vehicle Health Alert**
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
Performance Pages Plus**
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, **If vehicle is equipped.
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Register (4C/4C NAV)
touchscreen to get started.
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your 10
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vehicles purchased within the continental United States, vices.
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
SOS Call
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
564 MULTIMEDIA
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
Mobile App
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s 1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
Manual Supplement. services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your 2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
vehicle. Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
MULTIMEDIA 565
3. Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner
of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5-day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for 4C system.) 10
SiriusXM Travel Link
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5-day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
566 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available

MULTIMEDIA 567
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Siri Eyes Free 10
Available
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Do Not Disturb
Android Auto — If Equipped
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls may or may not be available in every region and/or
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. language.
568 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your Android Auto On 7-inch Display
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
MULTIMEDIA 569
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice 10
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
further information. • Phone
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android • Music
5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks • Messages
of Google Inc.
570 MULTIMEDIA
• Maps — if equipped
• Additional Apps — if equipped
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display

Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
MULTIMEDIA 571
General Information Uconnect System Support:
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio • U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and • Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). 1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: SiriusXM Guardian services support:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and • U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
2. This device must accept any interference received, in- 1-844-796-4827
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- • Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
tion. call: 1-877-324-9091
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
user’s authority to operate the equipment. To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
Additional Information 10
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner • If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a wiping from center to edge.
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks • Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. the disc.
572 MULTIMEDIA
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .577
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .575 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
11
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .575
574 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
Prepare A List
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the timely manner.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Be Reasonable With Requests
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance.
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 575
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center In Mexico Contact
should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
• Owner’s name and address
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
• Authorized dealer name
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA US LLC Customer Center FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 21–8004 P.O. Box 191857
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343 Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Fax: (787) 782-3345
P.O. Box 1621 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) 11
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufac-
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
turer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-
CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for ments.
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell We appreciate that you have made a major investment
Relay Service operator. when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
Service Contract also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
concerns.
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
WARNING!
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur- nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800- California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
(800) 387-9983 French). tained in vehicles and certain products of component
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con- wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
responsible for any service contract other than the manu- reproductive harm.
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and (Continued)
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 577
WARRANTY INFORMATION To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
vehicle and market.
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
MOPAR PARTS other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for In Canada
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
its best. should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
defect to the Canadian government should contact
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying 11
FCA US LLC. To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
and/or components is written in straightforward language
Call toll free at:
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals Or
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems • www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
INDEX
12
580 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .294 Air Conditioner Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 429
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 429
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 Air Pressure
Air Bag Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Alarm
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 32
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .225, 412 Rearm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Alarm System
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Alterations/Modifications
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 486
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 215, 255 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .428 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
INDEX 581
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Battery Saver Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Arming System Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 489
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .101 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 479
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 274 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fluid And Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 447 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 489 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 380
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . .280 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .130 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 12
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 427
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 424 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 485
582 INDEX
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 114 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Cleaning
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .171 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Child Restraints Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 443
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .244 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .441, 486, 487
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .234 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .230 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 294
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
INDEX 583
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 128 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 182
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . .282, 283
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .292
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .161
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Emergency, In Case Of
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Disposal Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 448
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 162 Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .171
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 162 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 40 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . . .40 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 423
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 423
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 12
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). . . . . . . . .535 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 485
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .130 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 486
Electric Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
584 INDEX
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 486 Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422, 427 Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Fluid Level Checks
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 486, 487 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487, 489
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 264 Fog Lights, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 427 Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 427 Folding Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .225, 412 Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 485 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 438 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Exterior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 257, 378 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Filters Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 429 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 257, 381, 382 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481, 486
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
INDEX 585
Fueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Hitches
Gasoline, (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Key Fob Not Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Keyless Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Keyless Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .75 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 372 12
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
586 INDEX
Integrated Trailer Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 505
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Inverter LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .394 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395, 448 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 215, 255
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 30 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .23 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 380
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
INDEX 587
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169 Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .161, 169
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator . . . . . .161 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 257 Load Shed Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Locks
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .163 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 168 Lug Nuts/Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .163, 171 12
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Manual
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378, 380 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74, 169, 257, 381, 382 Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
588 INDEX
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 486
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70, 372 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 427, 486
Modifications/Alterations Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Opener, Garage Door (Homelink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5, 577
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314, 323
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
INDEX 589
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .454 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Power Radio Frequency
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 29, 30, 39
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 489 Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314, 323
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Rear Seats, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Power Seats Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .362
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 54 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .364
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 54 Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 12
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Pretensioners Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
590 INDEX
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 30 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control . . . . . . . . . . .532 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202, 255
Remote Starting Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .207
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . .507 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .207
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .210
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202, 203, 205
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Seat Belts Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
INDEX 591
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 52, 54, 59 Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42, 52, 54 SiriusXM Guardian
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 59 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 45 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 465, 466, 467
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487, 489
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42 Speed Control
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 293
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 163 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Sentry Key Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .291, 292, 294
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 263, 264
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268, 269
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 12
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 264
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 274 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 264
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 257, 381, 382 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
592 INDEX
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 401, 448
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .532 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 465
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 472 Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 109 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454, 455
Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .164, 194
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401, 463
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 458
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .101 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 465, 467
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .454 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 458, 465, 471 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
INDEX 593
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274, 446
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 409 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (Homelink). . . . . . .115
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169, 381, 382
Towing Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Uconnect
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Uconnect Settings
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . .35, 40, 507
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 40, 505
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 12
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 283 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 455
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Vehicle Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 472
594 INDEX
Vehicle User Guide Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
In Vehicle Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 108
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Searching User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 427 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 424
Warning Flashers, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .164 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Warnings, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Wipers Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 424 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
EQUIPMENT normal may require special precautions.
Special design considerations are incorporated into this All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio ence between the communications equipment and the
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone vehicle’s electronic systems.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING:
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm.
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
your vehicle. For more information go to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2019 Durango
2019
OWNER’S MANUAL
Durango
19WD-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Second Edition
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in the U.S.A.

2019 Durango

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Durango

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Durango

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 Durango

2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3

4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 4

6 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 7

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 8

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User

Separating Case With A Coin

Emergency Key Removal

Dead Key Fob Battery

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —

Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard

Fold-Flat Second Row Seat

Tumble Pull Strap

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

Tumbled Second Row

Fold-Flat Second Row Seats

Mini Console Stepping Pad

Third Row Folded

Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

Rear Head Restraint

Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints

Center Head Restraint Release Button

Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Power Mirror Switch

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by

CAUTION! Automatic High Beam — If Equipped

Fog Light Operation

Front Map/Reading Lights

Intermittent Wiper System

Windshield Wiper Operation

Intermittent Wiper Operation Windshield Washer Operation

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Temperature Controls

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Temperature Controls

Climate Control OFF Button

Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Rear

Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode

72 Rear Temperature Display

Rear Lock Button

Rear Automatic Climate Controls

Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode

Rear Temperature Control

The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of

Power Window Switches

HOOD Hood Release

Safety Latch Location The power liftgate may be opened by pushing

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Door Panel Storage

Storage Compartment Latches

Upper Storage Compartment

Lower Storage Compartment

Storage Compartment Rear Push Button

Console Cubby Bins

Fold Flat Mode